JP7723976B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines played by players.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that draw special symbols and use notification effects (variable effects) to notify players whether or not they have won a jackpot (for example, Non-Patent Document 1).

"Pachinko Winning Guide", Guide Works Co., Ltd., published June 1, 2022, June 2022 issue, pages 18-21, Original Gingira Paradise

Gaming machines are always expected to provide enjoyment not only through winning gaming media (gaming balls, medals, etc.), but also through the game itself (presentation and gameplay). Gaming machines are also expected to provide a reasonable level of ease of understanding in terms of presentation, notifications, etc.

Therefore, one of the objects of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that attracts players.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned objectives, one aspect of the present invention employs the following configuration. Note that reference symbols, explanatory text, etc. in parentheses are merely examples of correspondence with the embodiments described below to facilitate understanding of this aspect of the present invention, and do not in any way limit the scope of this aspect of the present invention.

A gaming machine (1) according to one aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player,
A determination means (100) for making a determination;
a game control means (100) for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting predetermined commands based on the determination result by the determination means;
A presentation control means (400, etc.) that controls a predetermined game presentation based on the predetermined command transmitted by the game control means;
A display means (70) that can display the game performance;
and an operating means,
The performance control means
The display means can display a display effect (announcement effect) in which a specific image (decorative pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, then temporarily stopped, and then stopped.
When the specific image in the first column (left column) is temporarily stopped and displayed, a first emphasis effect (a temporary stop emphasis effect of the left decorative pattern) that emphasizes the specific image can be executed,
When the specific images in the first and second columns (right columns) are temporarily stopped and then the specific images in the third column (middle column) are temporarily stopped and displayed, a second emphasis effect (a temporary stop emphasis effect of a middle decorative pattern) that emphasizes the specific images can be executed,
A third emphasis effect (shaking emphasis; FIG. 30) that emphasizes the specific image during the temporary stop display can be executed.
The third emphasis effect may include a change effect that changes the specific image,
Specific notifications regarding performance effects (volume/light intensity gauges, etc.; Figures 70 to 73, etc.) can be executed.
The first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect can be performed by displaying an image and outputting an audible signal;
The third emphasis effect may be an image display effect without an audible output effect,
When the first emphasis effect is executed on the specific image in the first column (left column) and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect is executed on the specific image in the third column (middle column), and then the third emphasis effect of the specific image in the first column and the third emphasis effect of the specific image in the third column can be synchronized and executed,
The specific notification can be performed by displaying an image and outputting an audible signal,
The image display of at least one of the first highlight effect, the second highlight effect, and the third highlight effect can be restricted from affecting the image display of the specific notification (see, for example, FIGS. 74 to 77).
The display effect can be set in any one of a plurality of effect modes including a first effect mode and a second effect mode ,
In the display effect, a suggestion effect (operation prompt effect; button image, etc.) that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed can be executed,
A fourth emphasis effect (button image emphasis) that emphasizes the suggestive effect image in the suggestive effect can be executed,
The fourth emphasis effect may include a first emphasis effect that changes the suggestive effect image in a first cycle and a second emphasis effect that changes the suggestive effect image in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle (see paragraphs 0316, 0403, 0413, 0631, Figure 68, etc.).
When the first effect mode is set, a first sound effect related to the fourth emphasis effect can be output;
When the second effect mode is set, a second sound effect different from the first sound effect related to the fourth emphasis effect can be output;
The first sound effect and the second sound effect are not sound effects that are output in response to a preset setting by a player,
The fourth emphasis effect can be made different before and after the start of a predetermined special effect in the display effect,
A fifth emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation means can be executed,
The fifth emphasis effect may include an effect using a vibration sound of the operating means.

This invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that attracts the interest of players.

1 is a schematic front view showing an example of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment; FIG. 2 is an example of an enlarged view of a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of the rear face of a pachinko gaming machine 1. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in a pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the main control unit 100. An example of a detailed flowchart of a power shutdown monitoring process An example of a detailed flowchart of the recovery process 1 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 100. An example of a detailed flowchart of start port switch processing An example of a detailed flowchart of special symbol processing FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern determination table. An example of a detailed flowchart for processing large prize slots An example of a detailed flowchart for processing large prize slots An example of a detailed flowchart for processing large prize slots An example of a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process performed by the performance control unit 400 An example of a detailed flowchart showing a command reception process An example of a detailed flowchart showing a command reception process A diagram showing examples of decorative pattern numbers and colors Diagram showing examples of decorative designs A diagram for explaining the outline of the decorative pattern and the hold icon in the notification performance A diagram showing an example of the relationship between the color of the pending icon and the probability of winning Time chart for explaining the contents of the notification effects Time chart for explaining the contents of the notification effects FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the content of the notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a re-lottery effect in the notification effect according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a re-lottery effect in a notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a re-lottery effect in a notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a special symbol according to the third embodiment. FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 10 shows examples of highlighting effects FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect related to an operation response effect according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect related to an operation response effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an emphasis effect related to an operation response effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control relating to volume adjustment and the like according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control related to volume adjustment, etc. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining control relating to right-hit notification/left-hit notification and the like according to the sixth embodiment; A diagram for explaining control regarding right-hit notification/left-hit notification, etc. A diagram for explaining control regarding right-hit notification/left-hit notification, etc. A diagram for explaining control regarding right-hit notification/left-hit notification, etc. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining control related to left-handed hit notification and the like according to the seventh embodiment; A diagram for explaining control related to left-handed hit notification, etc. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining control regarding turning off of each device when power is interrupted according to the eighth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a game flow according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of background image control. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of background image control. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation of a decorative pattern according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an identification image according to the eleventh embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may also be simply referred to as the gaming machine 1.

[General configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
The general configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the first variable winning section 49 in Figure 1. Figure 3 is an example of a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 on which a gaming area 5a is formed through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening facing forward and backward, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front of the base frame. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the arcade's island equipment via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge 6 at one horizontal end, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge 7 at one horizontal end and is rotatably supported around the second hinge 7. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed. An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-to-rear direction (toward the front) is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4. A transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from behind, allowing the game area 5a to be viewed through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a. Around the opening 8 in the glass frame 4 are a speaker 9, a frame lamp 10 with multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing game balls such as those paid out when the conditions for awarding are met, a lower tray (not shown) for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit in the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path, and a lever 13 that can be operated to launch game balls. Also, although not shown in Figure 1, the game board 5 is provided with multiple board lamps 10a (see Figure 4).

Speakers 9 are installed at two locations spaced apart above the glass frame 4, and output background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc. to create sound (music, voice, etc.). Multiple frame lamps 10 are installed around the periphery of the opening 8, and lighting effects are created by changing the direction and color of the light emitted by each lamp (LED). The frame lamps 10 light up/flash when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs, preventing game balls from being paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3).

The bottom of the upper tray 11 slopes downward toward the lever 13 (to the right), and a ball feed solenoid (not shown) is provided at the end of the downward slope. When game balls stored in the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid, the ball feed solenoid operates to send the game balls one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3. In addition, in the front center of the upper tray 11, an effect button 16 and a cross key 18 are provided side by side, functioning as input devices for performing decision operations, selection operations, and the like related to the various effects described below. Furthermore, on the right side of the upper tray 11, a loan button 20 is provided that can be used to loan game balls and return storage media such as cards that store remaining balances.

The effect button 16 allows players to perform input operations such as confirm operations, and is equipped with an effect button detection switch (not shown) for detecting operation of the effect button 16, a button drive motor (not shown) for changing the effect button 16 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state, a button drive device (not shown) equipped with a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 16 between the normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED (not shown) for changing the effect button 16 between an off state and a lit (or flashing) state in which it emits light in a predetermined manner.

The cross key 18 allows players to perform input operations such as selection, and is equipped with an up button, a down button, a left button, a right button, and a cross key detection switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19.

In this embodiment, the effect button 16 is vibrated by the button drive device, but if another operating means (such as an effect lever that the player can operate to input) is provided in addition to the effect button 16, the effect lever may also be made to vibrate. The cross key 18 may also be made to vibrate, and furthermore, in addition to the operating means, a decorative member (such as one resembling a character) placed in a position that the player can touch may also be made to vibrate.

When the loan button 20 is operated, a ball loan machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1 deducts the remaining balance stored in the storage medium and loans out gaming balls.

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray (not shown) to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray. A full detection switch (not shown) is also provided midway along the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a full tray error, in which the lower tray becomes full of game balls. While the full detection switch detects that the lower tray is full, the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) stops paying out game balls.

The lever 13 is equipped with a rotatable launch handle 15, a touch sensor (not shown) that detects when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume (not shown) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby changing the launch speed of the game balls. When the touch sensor detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a ball feed solenoid (not shown) is activated, and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launcher 26 for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front and is located approximately in the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, allowing the game board 5 to be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-to-back direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section, and various devices mounted on the back side of the game board 5 can be seen from the rear of the gaming machine 1 through this opening.

The launching device 26 is equipped with a launching member for launching game balls, a launching solenoid (not shown) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left edge of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. The game ball is then sent to the launch position by the ball-feeding solenoid and launched toward the play area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is located on the right side of the game board mounting section, with the front end of the cylinder, in which the keyhole is formed, exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked, allowing it to be opened and closed; when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked, allowing it to be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35, 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by these inner and outer rails 35, 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35, 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection section of the game board mounting frame 3). A decorative frame 40 (center case) in the shape of a frame is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a to restrict game balls from entering the interior, and the decorative frame 40 divides the game area 5a into a left game area where game balls fired with a first firing strength flow down, and a right game area where game balls fired with a second firing strength that is stronger than the first firing strength flow down, with the left game area and the right game area being connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40, which guides game balls flowing down the left-side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided below the decorative frame 40, which allows game balls guided into the interior of the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 to flow downward below the decorative frame 40. Also, three regular prize openings 43 are provided below the left side of the decorative frame 40, through which game balls can always enter (win), and one regular prize opening 43 is provided below the right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has entered (wins) the regular prize opening 43 is detected by the regular prize opening switch 43a (see Figure 4) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start opening 45 (first special symbol start opening area) where game balls can always enter (win). When a game ball that has entered (wins) the first start opening 45 is detected by the first start opening switch 45a (the award condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination to determine whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted.

Below the decorative frame 40, diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is provided a variable starting section 46 that can be switched from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (score), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the satisfaction of specified conditions. The variable starting unit 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for the game balls, and is provided with an opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a second starting port 47 (starting winning area for the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the opening/closing member 48, a second starting port switch 47a (see Figure 4) that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second starting port 47, and a second starting port opening/closing unit 48b (solenoid) that converts the second starting port 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting port 47 to an open state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 backward (winning allowance position). When a game ball enters the second start port 47 and is detected by the second start port switch 47a (the award condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the player is granted the right to make a jackpot determination (lottery) to determine whether or not a special game (jackpot game) will be played.

In the right-side gaming area to the right of the decorative frame 40, there is a gate 44 (normal symbol start area) through which gaming balls can pass at any time. When a gaming ball that has passed through the gate 44 is detected by the gate switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but a normal symbol lottery is held to open the second start port 47.

Below the gate 44 is a first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to win, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot determination being made).

The first variable winning section 49 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (to the right in the figure) to form a flow path for game balls, and is equipped with an opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening/closing section 51b (see Figure 4) that changes the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and changes the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permissible position). When the opening/closing member 51 moves rearward during jackpot play and the first large prize opening 50 changes from a closed state to an open state, game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the opening/closing member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50 and are detected by the first large prize opening switch 50a, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

As shown in Figure 2, the first variable winning section 49 is translucent so that the interior can be seen, and is provided with a guide member 220, an opening/closing member 221, a guide member 222, and an outlet 223 inside. While the guide members 220 and 222 are fixed, the opening/closing member 221 can be moved back and forth (towards the front and back) by the specific area opening/closing section 150 (not shown in Figure 2). A specific area 224 is provided directly below the opening/closing member 221, and a game ball passing through the specific area 224 is detected by the specific area switch 151 (not shown in Figure 2). In Figure 2, a "V" mark is drawn on the specific area 224 so that it can be seen by the player. When the opening/closing member 221 is in a closed state in which it has moved forward, a gaming ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 and been detected by the first large prize opening switch 50a (not shown in FIG. 2 ) flows down the guide member 220, the opening/closing member 221, and the guide member 222 and enters the discharge opening 223 without passing through the specific area 224. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 221 is in an open state in which it has moved backward, a gaming ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 and been detected by the first large prize opening switch 50a (not shown in FIG. 2 ) has a high probability of passing through the specific area 224 before entering the discharge opening 223. As will be described later, if a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery, a small prize game is played and the opening/closing member 51 and the opening/closing member 221 are opened, allowing the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 224. If the game ball passes through the specific area 224 during a small win game, a big win (Type 2 big win) occurs and the big win game is played. Note that a big win resulting from the special symbol lottery is a Type 1 big win.

Below the first variable winning section 49 is a second variable winning section 55 that can be switched from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot being determined to have occurred).

The second variable prize winning section 55 (second variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to form a flow path for game balls, and is equipped with an opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-to-back directions, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) into the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening/closing section 57b (solenoid) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and changes the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permissible position). Then, when the opening/closing member 57 moves rearward during jackpot play and the second large prize opening 56 changes from a closed state to an open state, game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the opening/closing member 57 or that have reached the second large prize opening 56 enter the second large prize opening 56 and are detected by the second large prize opening switch 56a, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

A game ball launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then down through the stage section 42, and enter one of the three normal prize openings 43 or the first start opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or flow into the outlet 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter (pass through) the gate 44, normal prize opening 43, first variable prize opening 49 (first large prize opening 50), or second variable prize opening 55 (second large prize opening 56) located in the right-hand game area. Furthermore, a gaming ball launched into the right-hand gaming area flows downstream via the upstream flow path 91a and either wins in one of the normal winning openings 43, the variable starting opening 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning opening 49 (first large winning opening 50), or the second variable winning opening 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-hand gaming area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, a gaming ball will not win in the normal winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-hand gaming area.

On the back side of the gaming board 5, there is an out ball flow path that receives and collects out balls, including gaming balls that have won in the normal winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, and second large winning opening 56, as well as gaming balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down. An out ball switch (not shown) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. Gaming balls detected by the out ball switch are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the gaming machine 1 to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (to the island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62; a reserve display device consisting of a first special pattern reserve display 63, a second special pattern reserve display 64, and a normal pattern reserve display 65; and a main information display 59 consisting of a round number display 66, a right-hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68. This main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to light up dynamically.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination (the result of the special symbol lottery) made based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the first starting gate 45. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination (the result of the special symbol lottery) made based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the second starting gate 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the normal symbol hit determination (the result of the normal symbol lottery) made based on the passage (entry) of a gaming ball into the gate 44. A jackpot determination involves obtaining determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained determination information. When a jackpot determination is made based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol display 60 displays a varying first special symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed as a still symbol to indicate the determination result. When a jackpot determination is made based on a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol display 61 displays a varying second special symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed as a still symbol to indicate the determination result.

When displaying a normal symbol, the LED of the normal symbol display 62 flashes at a predetermined interval or sequence. When a normal symbol is displayed in a static state, the LED lights up in a manner that notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a 7-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot determination determines that a jackpot has been won, a static display of numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed, and if a loss has been determined, a static display of "-" can be displayed, and during the variable display, the display can alternate between being turned off and displaying "-".

The first special symbol reserve indicator 63 is used to display the first reserve number (U1), which is the number of judgment information (first reserves) stored when a gaming ball wins (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserves. Note that a maximum of four first reserves can be stored, but this number may be more or less than four. The second special symbol reserve indicator 64 is used to display the second reserve number (U2), which is the number of judgment information (second reserves) stored when a gaming ball wins (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserves. Note that a maximum of four second reserves can be stored, but this number may be more or less than four, or no second reserves may be stored. The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is used to display the number of normal symbols reserved, which is the number of judgment information (normal symbol reserves) stored when a gaming ball enters (passes through) the gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of normal symbols reserved. Note that up to four normal symbols can be stored, but this number may be more or less than four, or no normal symbols may be stored.

The round number indicator 66 is used to display the number of rounds when a jackpot (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs begin to light up in a predetermined pattern indicating the number of rounds, remain lit during the jackpot game, and turn off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs will light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is used to display a right-hit message that encourages the player to fire the game ball toward the right-hand game area (so-called right-hit) during jackpot play or in time-saving play mode, and the LED lights up during jackpot play or time-saving play mode.

The status confirmation indicator 68 indicates whether the gaming machine 1 is set to a setting change mode for changing the set value of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery, or a setting confirmation mode for confirming that set value. In the gaming machine 1, the gaming parlor can set the winning probability of the special symbol lottery to one of multiple winning probabilities. When the gaming parlor enters setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the LED begins to light up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. As such, because the status confirmation indicator 68 is located on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, the gaming parlor can easily confirm whether the gaming machine is set to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, or in other locations.

Inside the play area 5a, there is a sub-information display 80 consisting of a sub-1 change indicator 81, a sub-2 change indicator 82, a sub-1 hold indicator 83, a sub-2 hold indicator 84, a sub-regular change indicator 85, a sub-regular hold indicator 86, and a sub-right-hit indicator 87. The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to light up dynamically. Note that the sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above that indicates whether it is set to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is used to display (indicate) whether the first special symbol is being displayed or not, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is used to display (indicate) whether the second special symbol is being displayed or not. Each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins to change, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (on for 0.5 seconds, then off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary. The sub-first variable indicator 81 or the sub-second variable indicator 82 may also be used to indicate the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol. In this case, the LED should light up in the event of a jackpot, and turn off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number), and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off, when the hold number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 is used to display (announce) the results of the regular symbol lottery, and is composed of a single LED. When the regular symbol variation display begins, the LED flashes (varies) at a predetermined interval. When the regular symbol is displayed stationary, a display indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up if there is a win, and goes out if there is a loss) is displayed stationary. Note that the sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 may flash while the regular symbol is displaying a variation, and light up or go out when the regular symbol is displayed stationary, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the regular symbol variation display is in progress.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off; when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is off; when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit; and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-right-hit indicator 87 is designed to encourage the player to fire the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (a so-called right hit), and is composed of a single LED. The LED lights up during jackpot play and in time-saving play mode, and is off in other play modes.

A main image display unit 70 consisting of an LCD display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a sub-image display unit 71 consisting of an LCD display smaller in size than the main image display unit 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the main image display unit 70. A movable prop 733 for executing action and lamp effects is provided at the top of the performance space 40a. The main image display unit 70 and sub-image display unit 71 are sometimes collectively referred to as the image display unit.

The main image display unit 70 and sub-image display unit 71 display various effects depending on the progress of the game. These effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the special symbol variable display is not being executed, a notification effect (variation effect) that accompanies the variable display of decorative symbols (performance symbols) that is performed when the special symbol variable display is being executed, and a jackpot game effect that is performed while a jackpot game is being executed. Furthermore, the sub-image display unit 71 can perform a movement effect by moving using a solenoid or motor while the main image display unit 70 is executing a variable effect. Note that the sub-image display unit 71 does not necessarily have to be provided; for example, a movable device that performs actions such as illuminating a lamp and moving may be provided at the position where the sub-image display unit 71 is provided.

On the back of the gaming board mounting frame 3 and gaming board 5 are a payout device 95 for paying out gaming balls based on the fulfillment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a gaming ball storage unit 96 for storing gaming balls supplied from island equipment and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control unit 110A incorporating the main control board that constitutes the main control unit 100, a payout control device 120A incorporating the payout control board that constitutes the payout control unit 300 and the launch control unit 200, a performance control device 130A incorporating the performance control board that constitutes the performance control unit 400, the image and sound control unit 500, and the lamp control unit 600, a power supply unit 160A incorporating a power supply board, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to an external device (such as a hall computer) outside the gaming machine.

In addition, a door-type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes on either side of a rotation axis set on one side to cover the top of the main control device and the entire presentation control device from the rear. The presentation control device 130A is provided with a selector switch 22, covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to the volume of presentation sounds etc. output from the speaker 9 and the light intensity of the display devices (main image display unit, sub-image display unit) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 10, etc.). Also, near the selector switch 22, a rear key 170 (see Figure 4), not shown in Figure 3, is provided. When the rear key 170 is in the adjustment mode for adjusting the volume set by the selector switch 22, the volume output from the speaker 9 can be adjusted by a gaming parlor staff member or the like from the back of the gaming board 5. Furthermore, when the rear key 170 is in an adjustment mode for adjusting the light intensity using the selector switch 22, the light intensity of various lighting devices (for example, the frame lamp 10) can be adjusted (set to either normal light intensity or a dimmer light intensity) from the back of the gaming board 5 by a gaming parlor staff member or the like.

On the front side of the main control board are mounted the main control unit 100, which consists of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling gameplay; an RWM clear switch 111a, which inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in the RAM 103 of the main control unit 100 or to update the setting value that sets the game's advantage (the probability of winning the special symbol lottery); a setting key switch 112a, which inputs a signal to switch to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode; an information display 113, which displays performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be understood; and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays aligned horizontally. The two 7-segment displays from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information indicating setting values and performance information values.

[Configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, a control device for controlling operations and processing signals in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1.

In Figure 4, the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control unit 100, a launch control unit 200, a payout control unit 300, a performance control unit 400, an image and sound control unit 500, and a lamp control unit 600.

The main control unit 100 comprises a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 101, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 102, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 103. The CPU 101 performs calculations when carrying out various controls related to the number of prize balls to be paid out, such as internal lotteries and winning determinations. The ROM 102 stores programs executed by the CPU 101 and various data. The RAM 103 is used as a working memory for the CPU 101. The main functions of the main control unit 100 are explained below.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the main control unit 100 conducts a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) and sends determination result data indicating whether or not the special symbol lottery has been won to the performance control unit 400.

The main control unit 100 controls the open time for which the opening/closing member 48 of the variable start unit 46 is in the open state, the number of times the opening/closing member 48 opens and closes, and the time interval between opening and closing of the opening/closing member 48. The main control unit 100 also manages the number of times the special pattern lottery is suspended when the gaming ball enters the first start gate 45, the number of times the special pattern lottery is suspended when the gaming ball enters the second start gate 47, and the number of times the normal pattern lottery is suspended when the gaming ball passes through the gate 44, and sends data related to these suspended times to the performance control unit 400.

The main control unit 100 controls the opening and closing of the major prize openings (first major prize opening 50, second major prize opening 56) depending on the result of the special pattern lottery (won a big prize or small prize). For example, the main control unit 100 controls the round in which the major prize opening (first major prize opening 50 or second major prize opening 56) is open to be repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 15 times) until a predetermined condition is met (e.g., 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won). The main control unit 100 also controls the time interval between opening and closing of the major prize openings (first major prize opening 50, second major prize opening 56).

When a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the main control unit 100 changes the opening/closing member 221 inside the first variable winning unit 49 (the first large winning opening 50 that has been opened due to the small jackpot win) from a closed state to an open state, allowing the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 224 (see Figure 2). In this case, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 224, the main control unit 100 generates a jackpot.

The main control unit 100 changes the game state according to the progress of the game, and also changes the execution interval of the special symbol lottery (which can be said to be the time from when the special symbol is displayed variably on the main information display 59 until it is displayed stationary), the opening and closing operation of the variable starter unit 46, etc. according to the progress of the game.

When a gaming ball enters the first start gate 45, the second start gate 47, the large prize gates (first large prize gate 50, second large prize gate 56), or the normal prize gate 43, the main control unit 100 instructs the payout control unit 300 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per gaming ball depending on where the gaming ball entered. Even if the main control unit 100 detects that a gaming ball has passed through gate 44, it does not instruct the payout control unit 300 to pay out prize balls in conjunction with this. When the payout control unit 300 pays out prize balls in accordance with the instruction of the main control unit 100, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out is sent from the payout control unit 300 to the main control unit 100. The main control unit 100 then manages the number of prize balls paid out based on the information obtained from the payout control unit 300.

The main control unit 100 displays (notifies) the player of the results of the special symbol lottery, the results of the normal symbol lottery, the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol lottery, the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol lottery, the number of rounds of jackpot play, etc. The main control unit 100 also displays performance information that allows the player to grasp the actual performance of the gaming machine, and setting values that set the degree of advantage in play (probability of winning the special symbol lottery) on the surface of the main control board. The main control unit 100 also clears the contents of RAM 103 in response to operations by a gaming parlor staff member or the like, and sets the above-mentioned setting values to one of several predetermined fixed values. The main control unit 100 also transitions the gaming machine to a setting change mode in which the above-mentioned setting values can be changed, or a setting confirmation mode in which the setting status of the above-mentioned setting values can be confirmed in response to operations by a gaming parlor staff member or the like. The main control unit 100 also outputs information related to the game to an external gaming machine (an information gathering device such as a hall computer).

To realize the above-mentioned functions, the main control unit 100 is connected to the first start port switch 45a, the second start port switch 47a, the second start port opening/closing unit 48b, the gate switch 44a, the first large prize port switch 50a, the second large prize port switch 56a, the first large prize port opening/closing unit 51b, the second large prize port opening/closing unit 57b, the specific area switch 151, the specific area opening/closing unit 150, the normal prize port switch 43a, the main information display 59 (see Figure 1), the information display 113, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the game information output terminal board 90.

The first start port switch 45a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to a game ball entering the first start port 45. The second start port switch 47a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to a game ball entering the second start port 47. The second start port opening/closing unit 48b opens and closes the opening/closing member 48 of the variable start unit 46 in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The gate switch 44a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to a game ball passing through the gate 44. The first large prize port switch 50a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to a game ball entering the first large prize port 50. The first large prize port opening/closing unit 51b opens and closes the first large prize port 50 in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The second large prize opening switch 56a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to a game ball entering the second large prize opening 56. The second large prize opening opening opening unit 57b opens and closes the second large prize opening 56 in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The specific area switch 151 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to a game ball passing through the specific area 224 (see FIG. 2). The specific area opening and closing unit 150 opens and closes the specific area 224 (opening and closing member 221) in response to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The normal prize opening switch 43a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to a game ball entering the normal prize opening 43. The main information display 59 displays (announces) the results of the special symbol lottery, the results of the normal symbol lottery, the number of reserved special symbol lottery games, the number of reserved normal symbol lottery games, the number of rounds of jackpot play, etc. in response to control signals sent from the main control unit 100. The information display 113 displays (on the surface of the main control board) performance information that enables the actual performance of the gaming machine to be understood and setting values that set the degree of advantage in play (the probability of winning the special symbol lottery). The RWM clear switch 113a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 to clear the contents of the RAM 103 or to set the above-mentioned setting values in response to operation by a gaming parlor employee, etc. The setting key switch 112a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 to transition to a setting change mode in which the above-mentioned setting values can be changed or a setting confirmation mode in which the setting status of the above-mentioned setting values can be confirmed. The game information output terminal board 90 outputs game information to an external device (such as a hall computer) outside the gaming machine 1.

The launch control unit 200 includes a CPU 201, a ROM 202, and a RAM 203. The CPU 201 performs calculations when carrying out various controls related to the launch device 26. The ROM 202 stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc. The RAM 203 is used as a working memory for the CPU 201, etc.

When the lever 13 is in the neutral position, it does not output a signal and is in a firing stop state. When the player rotates the lever 13 clockwise, it outputs a signal corresponding to the rotation angle to the firing control unit 200 as a ball firing command signal. The firing control unit 200 controls the firing operation of the firing device 26 based on the ball firing command signal. For example, the firing control unit 200 controls the operation of the firing device 26 so that the speed at which the game ball is fired increases as the rotation angle of the lever 13 increases. When the firing control unit 200 outputs a signal indicating that a stop button (not shown) provided on the lever 13 has been pressed, it stops the firing operation of the firing device 26.

The payout control unit 300 includes a CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The CPU 301 performs calculations when controlling the payout of balls. The ROM 302 stores programs executed by the CPU 301, various data, etc. The RAM 303 is used as a working memory for the CPU 301, etc.

The payout control unit 300 controls the payout of balls based on commands sent from the main control unit 100. Specifically, the payout control unit 300 receives a command from the main control unit 100 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the gaming ball landed. It then controls the payout device 95 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command.

The performance control unit 400 is equipped with a CPU 401, ROM 402, RAM 403, and RTC (real-time clock) 404. The cross key 18 operated by the player is also connected to the performance control unit 400, and the performance control unit 400 acquires operation data output from the cross key 18 in response to the player's operation of the cross key 18. The performance control unit 400 also acquires operation data output from the performance button 16 via the lamp control unit 600. The CPU 401 performs calculations when controlling the performance. The ROM 402 stores programs executed by the CPU 401, various data, etc. The RAM 403 is used as working memory for the CPU 401, etc. The RTC 404 measures the current date and time.

The effect control unit 400 sets the effect content based on data indicating the results of the special symbol lottery, etc., sent from the main control unit 100. Furthermore, when the player presses the effect button 16 or cross key 18, the effect control unit 400 may set the effect content according to the operation input or detection results.

The image and audio control unit 500 comprises a CPU 501, a ROM 502, and a RAM 503. The CPU 501 performs calculations when controlling the images and audio that represent the performance content. The ROM 502 stores programs executed by the CPU 501, various data, etc. The RAM 503 is used as a working memory for the CPU 501, etc.

Based on commands sent from the performance control unit 400, the image and sound control unit 500 controls the images displayed on the image display units (main image display unit 70, sub-image display unit 71) and the sounds output from the speaker 9. Specifically, the ROM 502 of the image and sound control unit 500 stores image data for displaying on the image display unit, such as decorative pattern images for announcing the results of the special pattern lottery, images of characters and items for displaying preview effects and pre-read preview effects, a hold icon indicating that the special pattern lottery is on hold, and various background images. The ROM 502 of the image and sound control unit 500 also stores various sound data, such as music and voice, to be output from the speaker 9 in conjunction with the images displayed on the image display unit or independently of the displayed images. The CPU 501 of the image and sound control unit 500 selects and reads the image and sound data stored in ROM 502 that corresponds to the commands sent from the performance control unit 400. The CPU 501 then uses the read image data to perform image processing for background image display, decorative pattern image display, character/item display, etc., and performs various effect displays in response to commands sent from the effect control unit 400. The CPU 501 then displays an image represented by the image-processed image data on the image display unit. The CPU 501 also performs audio processing using the read audio data, and outputs the audio represented by the audio-processed audio data from the speaker 9. The image/audio control unit 500 also adjusts the volume output from the speaker 9 in response to a signal generated when the rear key 170 is operated.

The lamp control unit 600 comprises a CPU 601, ROM 602, and RAM 603. The CPU 601 performs calculations when controlling the board lamp 10a, frame lamp 10, effect button 16, movable role object 73, and sub-information display 80. The ROM 602 stores programs executed by the CPU 601, various data, etc. The RAM 603 is used as a working memory for the CPU 601, etc.

The lamp control unit 600 controls the lighting/flashing and light color of the board lamp 10a, frame lamp 10, effect button 16, and movable role object 73 based on commands sent from the performance control unit 400. The lamp control unit 600 also controls the operation of the effect button 16 and movable role object 73 based on commands sent from the performance control unit 400. Specifically, the ROM 602 of the lamp control unit 600 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light-emitting pattern data) for the board lamp 10a, etc., corresponding to the performance content set by the performance control unit 400. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the light-emitting pattern data stored in ROM 602 that corresponds to the command sent from the performance control unit 400. The CPU 601 then controls the lighting of the board lamp 10a, etc., based on the read-out light-emitting pattern data. The ROM 602 also stores operation pattern data for the effect button 16 and movable role object 73, corresponding to the performance content set by the performance control unit 400. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 602 that corresponds to the command sent from the performance control unit 400. The CPU 601 then controls the operation of the performance button 16 and the movable role object 73 based on the read operation pattern data. The lamp control unit 600 also controls the display (lighting, etc.) of the sub-performance display 80 based on the command sent from the performance control unit 400.

In addition, the lamp control unit 600 adjusts the light intensity of the lamps (LEDs) of the board lamp 10a, frame lamp 10, effect button 16, and movable prop 73 in response to a signal generated when the rear key 170 is operated.

The lamp control unit 600 is also connected to the effect button 16 operated by the player, and the lamp control unit 600 acquires operation data output from the effect button 16 in response to the player's operation of the effect button 16, and transmits the operation data to the effect control unit 400.

The effect control unit 400 notifies the image and audio control unit 500 of the operation status of the effect button 16 and the cross key 18 based on the operation data of the effect button 16 transmitted from the lamp control unit 600 and the operation data output from the cross key 18. The operation status of the effect button 16 and the cross key 18 includes information such as whether an operation is being performed and what type of operation is being performed (for example, a long press of the effect button 16 or a press of the left key on the cross key 18). Therefore, for example, when the effect button 16 is operated by a player, the operation status of the effect button 16 detected by the lamp control unit 600 is transmitted to the image and audio control unit 500 via the effect control unit 400. Therefore, the image and audio control unit 500 can change the content of the effect, etc., based on the operation status of the effect button 16, etc. transmitted from the effect control unit 400. Furthermore, the effect control unit 400 can send a command to the lamp control unit 600 in accordance with the operation data of the effect button 16 transmitted from the lamp control unit 600 to operate the movable role object 73 and execute a movable role object effect.

[Outline of the gaming state in this embodiment]
Next, the gaming states of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. The gaming states of the gaming machine 1 include at least a low-probability state, a time-saving state, and a non-time-saving state. The low-probability state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set to a normal low probability (for example, 1/300). Note that the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not have a high-probability state in which the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability (for example, 1/50) than in the low-probability state.

The non-time-shortened state is a gaming state in which the special symbol lottery is performed for the normal duration, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is a normal low probability (e.g., 1/10), and even if the normal symbol lottery is won, the variable start unit 46 is only controlled to open for a short period of time (e.g., once every 0.10 seconds). For this reason, the non-time-shortened state is a gaming state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second start hole 47.

The time-saving state is a gaming state in which the execution time of the special symbol lottery is shorter than in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is higher (e.g., 10/10) than in the non-electric support state, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the variable starter 46 is controlled to open for a long period of time (e.g., three times for 2.00 seconds). Therefore, the time-saving state is a gaming state in which the variable starter 46 is frequently opened for long periods of time, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starter hole 47 frequently (winning), and in which multiple special symbol lotteries can be executed in a short period of time while reducing the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving state.

In this embodiment, a gaming state controlled to a low-probability state and non-time-saving state is called a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (sometimes called a "normal gaming state"), and a gaming state controlled to a low-probability state and time-saving state is called a low-probability time-saving gaming state (sometimes called a "time-saving gaming state"). Also, as mentioned above, this embodiment does not provide a high-probability state, so it is not controlled to a high-probability time-saving gaming state (probability variable gaming state) that is controlled to a high-probability state and time-saving state. Note that while control is in the normal gaming state during jackpot play, since jackpot play is being executed, it can also be considered that control is in the jackpot gaming state during jackpot play.

Next, with reference to Figure 5, the above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" will be described in detail. In conventional gaming machines, the transition from the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is typically via routes (A) and (D) in Figure 5. In this embodiment, in addition to the conventional routes (A) and (D), a transition route to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is provided. Specifically, as shown in Figure 5 (B), when a predetermined condition is met in the normal game state, the game transitions to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" without first going through a jackpot game.

An example of "a predetermined condition being met" is when the number of times the variable display of a special symbol has been executed from the starting point reaches N times. For example, RAM 103 is provided with an area that counts and stores the number of times the variable display of a special symbol has been executed in the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)," and when the number of times counted and stored in that area reaches N times, the game transitions from the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)."

"N times" can be set to any number of times for each setting value that determines the probability of winning the special symbol lottery. For example, if the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is "1/199," N times can be set to around "500," and if the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is "1/319," N times can be set to around "900."

An example of the "starting point" is the state in which the RWM clear switch 111a is operated to clear the RWM, thereby clearing the information stored in RAM 103 (such as the number of times the special symbol lottery has been performed and the number of jackpots). Another example is the end of the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)," i.e., the state shown in (E) in Figure 5.

The upper limit of the number of times that the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" can be entered is, for example, 100 times when transitioning via (d) in Figure 5. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times that the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" can be entered is, for example, 1000 times when transitioning via (b) in Figure 5. In other words, the upper limit of the number of times that the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" can be entered is higher when transitioning via the fulfillment of a predetermined condition without a jackpot game than when transitioning via a jackpot game.

This provides players with information to help them decide whether or not to play, reducing the number of players who play recklessly. Furthermore, for example, if N is around 900 times, it is possible to provide relief measures to players who have not won a jackpot for a long time, which will help prevent players from abandoning the game. The number of N times can be easily understood by players through magazines, etc. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is met to transition to a "low-probability time-limited game state (time-limited game state)," the upper limit number of times for the "low-probability time-limited game state (time-limited game state)" is higher than when transitioning to a "low-probability time-limited game state (time-limited game state)" via a jackpot game. This can encourage players to actively try playing the "low-probability non-time-limited game state (normal game state)," improving the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, when a "predetermined condition is met," the number of spins up to "N times" may be actively notified. For example, a notification (display) such as "Only XX spins left to enter △△ state!" may be made on the main image display unit 70, etc. On the other hand, a suggestion may be made without an active notification. For example, when the number of spins approaches "N times," a special presentation (background, mode) may be used to suggest that "N times" is approaching.

Next, we will explain the processing flow executed by pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Main processing by main control unit 100]
First, the main processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Note that this main processing starts when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and is executed continuously while the main control unit 100 is running.

In step S901 of FIG. 6, the CPU 101 first waits, for example, for 2000 ms, and then the process proceeds to step S902. Although not shown, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 401 of the presentation control unit 400 enters a state in which it can receive a signal from the main control unit 100 without performing any standby processing. In other words, the CPU 401 of the presentation control unit 400 enters a state in which it can start processing before the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100.

In step S902, the CPU 101 is able to access the RAM 103, and processing proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 111a is "ON." If the determination in step S903 is YES, processing proceeds to step S904; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S907.

In step S904, the CPU 101 clears the RAM. Since RAM clearing is a well-known technique and will not be described in detail, it resets various pieces of information stored in the RAM 103 (such as information indicating the game status and the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed) to a predetermined initial state. Then, processing proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, the CPU 101 sets the working area for clearing RAM, and processing proceeds to step S906.

In step S906, the CPU 101 performs initial settings for the peripheral units. Here, the peripheral units include the performance control unit 400 and the payout control unit 300. The initial settings for the peripheral units are performed by sending an initial setting command to each control unit to instruct it to perform the initial setting. Processing then proceeds to step S910.

In step S907, CPU 101 determines whether the backup flag is "ON." The backup flag is a flag that is turned on if backup data generation is completed successfully when the power is cut off, and is associated with the generated backup data to indicate that the backup data is valid. If the determination in step S907 is YES, processing proceeds to step S908; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S904.

In step S908, CPU 101 determines whether the checksum is normal. If the determination in step S908 is YES, processing proceeds to step S909; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S904.

In step S909, the CPU 101 executes the recovery process (see Figure 8) described below, and then the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S910, CPU 101 sets the period (4 ms) of the built-in CTC (timer counter). CPU 101 then executes the timer interrupt process (see Figure 9), which will be described later, using the period set here. Then, processing proceeds to step S911.

In step S911, the CPU 101 executes the power shutdown monitoring process (see Figure 7) described below, and then proceeds to step S912.

In step S912, the CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt processing to be disabled, and processing proceeds to step S913.

In step S913, the CPU 101 updates (counts up) various initial random numbers, and processing proceeds to step S914. Here, the initial random numbers are random numbers used to determine the starting values of various random numbers (jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers) that are counted up and updated in the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 9) described below. Multiple initial random numbers are provided corresponding to various random numbers. The initial random numbers are counted up and updated both in the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 9) that occurs every predetermined CTC period (4 ms) and in the main processing (see Figure 6) that is processed during the remaining time (i.e., the predetermined CTC period minus the processing time required for the timer interrupt processing). After reaching the maximum value (e.g., 299) of the set random number, they return to the minimum value (e.g., 0). Furthermore, this remaining time varies depending on the processing status of the CPU 101, making it an irregular time, and the number of times the initial random numbers are updated during the remaining time is also irregular. On the other hand, as will be explained in more detail below, the other random numbers (jackpot random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers) are only updated by timer interrupt processing (see Figure 9), and therefore the processing cycle for the random number update process differs from that of the initial value random number. Due to this difference in processing cycle, even if the random number range for the initial value random number and the jackpot random number is the same (e.g., 0 to 299), the value of the initial value random number obtained as the starting value for the jackpot random number will be irregular each time. This makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the jackpot random number value that will cause a jackpot will be obtained.

In step S914, the CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt processing to allow interrupts, and processing returns to step S911. In other words, the CPU 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S911 to S914.

[Power Shutdown Monitoring Process by Main Control Unit 100]
Fig. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the power cutoff monitoring process in step S911 in Fig. 6. In step S9111 in Fig. 6, the CPU 101 prohibits interrupt processing, and the process proceeds to step S9112.

In step S9112, the CPU 101 determines whether the power supply to the gaming machine 1 has been cut off based on whether a power cut-off signal has been input from a power supply unit (not shown). If the determination in step S9112 is YES, processing proceeds to step S9114; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S9113.

In step S9113, the CPU 101 allows interrupt processing and terminates the power shutdown monitoring process (processing proceeds to step S912 in Figure 6).

On the other hand, in step S9114, CPU 101 clears the output ports through which various information is input and output to CPU 101, and processing proceeds to step S9115.

In step S9115, the CPU 101 creates backup data in RAM 103 based on the current gaming status of the gaming machine 1, etc., and then creates a checksum from the contents of RAM 103 and stores it in RAM 103. This processing is performed during the period from when it is detected that the power supply voltage has begun to drop due to a power outage of the power supplied to the main control unit 100 (from when a "YES" judgment is made in step S9112) until the power supply voltage drops to a predetermined value. This processing stores gaming status information and the like immediately before the power was shut off in RAM 103. Processing then proceeds to step S9116.

In step S9116, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to "ON" and processing proceeds to step S9117.

In step S9117, CPU 101 prohibits access to RAM 103 and terminates the power shutdown monitoring process (processing proceeds to step S912 in Figure 6).

[Recovery process by main control unit 100]
Fig. 8 is a detailed flowchart of the recovery process in step S909 in Fig. 6. First, in step S9091 in Fig. 8, the CPU 101 sets a work area in the RAM 103 for recovery, and the process proceeds to step S9092.

In step S9092, the CPU 101 references the information in RAM 103 to confirm information regarding the game status and the number of reserved special symbol lotteries at the time of the power outage, and sends a recovery notification command including this information to the presentation control unit 400. In this way, the CPU 101 sends a recovery notification command indicating the status at the time of the power outage to the presentation control unit 400 to notify that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 has been restored. By processing step S9092, the presentation control unit 400 can confirm the game status, etc., before the power outage.

In step S9093, the CPU 101 sets the peripheral area, and processing proceeds to step S9094.

In step S9094, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to "OFF" and terminates the recovery process (processing proceeds to step S910 in Figure 6).

[Timer interrupt processing in the main control unit]
Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 100. The timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described below with reference to FIG. 9. During normal operation, except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off, the main control unit 100 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in FIG. 9 at regular intervals (4 milliseconds). Note that the processing executed by the main control unit 100, which will be described based on the flowcharts in and after FIG. 9, is executed based on a program stored in ROM 102.

First, in step S1, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 executes a random number update process to update various random numbers, such as the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number, and to update the initial value random number that serves as the starting value when each random number is counted up and updated. Here, the jackpot random number is a random number used to determine whether or not the special pattern lottery has been won (i.e., to conduct a special pattern lottery). The pattern random number is a random number used to determine the type of jackpot if the special pattern lottery has been won. Note that the determination of whether or not the special pattern lottery has been won and the determination of the type of jackpot if a win has been won can be considered as the special pattern lottery. The jackpot random number and pattern random number are random numbers used in the process of step S407 in Figure 11, which will be described later. The reach random number is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach effect will be performed if the special pattern lottery has been lost. The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern that defines the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Here, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equal to the execution time of the notification effect (fluctuation effect) that is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation of the special symbol. The reach random number and fluctuation pattern random number are used in the processing of step S408 in FIG. 11 , which will be described later. In the random number update processing of step S1, the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are each updated by incrementing by one. In other words, they are counted up. Then, in the start switch (SW) processing of step S2 and the gate switch (SW) processing of step S3, each random number is acquired and used in the special symbol processing of step S4 and the normal symbol processing of step S5, which will be described later. Note that the counter that performs the processing of step S1 is typically a loop counter, which returns to 0 (i.e., loops) after reaching the maximum value of the set random number (e.g., 299 for the fluctuation pattern random number). Furthermore, in the random number update process of step S1, when the loop counter for each counter, such as the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number, counts through one cycle, it acquires the initial value random number corresponding to each random number at that time and starts a new count for the loop counter, using the value of that initial value random number as the starting value. Note that the random number ranges for the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number, etc., can be set arbitrarily, but it is preferable to set them to different ranges so that the counter values (count values) between these random numbers are not synchronized.

Next, in step S2, the CPU 101 monitors the state of the first start port switch 45a and the second start port switch 47a, and when it determines that a gaming ball has entered the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, it executes start port switch processing, which performs processing related to the reserved number U1 for the first special pattern lottery and the reserved number U2 for the second special pattern lottery, and processing to obtain various random numbers. Details of this start port switch processing will be described later with reference to Figure 10.

Next, in step S3, the CPU 101 monitors the state of the gate switch 44a, and when it determines that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 44, it determines whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol lottery is less than an upper limit (e.g., 4), and if it determines that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, it executes gate switch processing to obtain a random number to be used in the normal symbol processing in step S5, which will be described later.

Next, in step S4, the CPU 101 executes a first special symbol lottery or a second special symbol lottery, causes the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to variably display the special symbol, and then executes special symbol processing to display the stopped symbols indicating the results of these lotteries and to send various commands to the performance control unit 400. This special symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 11.

Next, in step S5, CPU 101 executes normal symbol processing to determine whether the random number acquired in the gate switch processing in step S3 matches a predetermined winning random number. Then, CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 62 to variably display a normal symbol, and then causes a normal symbol indicating the determination result to be statically displayed. Specifically, CPU 101 sets the normal symbol variation time, during which the normal symbol is statically displayed after variably displaying it, to, for example, 10 seconds in the non-time-saving state, and shortens it to, for example, 0.5 seconds in the time-saving state. Furthermore, CPU 101 sets the probability that the normal symbol displayed on normal symbol display 62 will become a predetermined winning symbol (i.e., the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery) to a low probability (e.g., 1/10) in the non-time-saving state, and increases it to a high probability (e.g., 0/10) in the time-saving state.

Next, in step S6, if the special symbol processing in step S4 determines that the special symbol lottery has been won (a jackpot) or that the special symbol lottery has been won, the CPU 101 executes large prize opening processing, which controls the large prize opening opening/closing units (first large prize opening opening/closing unit 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing unit 57b) to cause the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) to perform predetermined opening/closing operations. The CPU 101 also transmits various commands to the effect control unit 400 regarding the large prize game effects executed during a jackpot game and the small prize game effects executed during a small prize game. This processing allows the jackpot game (special game) and small prize game to proceed, allowing the player to win a large number of prize balls. This large prize opening processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 16 to 18.

Next, in step S7, the CPU 101 executes a second start opening/closing process to activate the variable start unit 46 if the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display 62 by the normal pattern process in step S5 is a predetermined winning pattern (i.e., if the normal pattern lottery is won). In this process, the CPU 101 controls the variable start unit 46 to open for a very short period of time (e.g., once every 0.10 seconds) in the non-time-saving state, and controls the variable start unit 46 to open for a long period of time (e.g., twice every 0.90 seconds) in the time-saving state. Controlling the variable start unit 46 to the open state makes it possible for a game ball to enter the second start opening 47, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 47, a second special pattern lottery is held.

Next, in step S8, the CPU 101 executes prize ball processing, which manages the number of winning game balls and controls the payout of prize balls according to the winning balls.

Next, in step S9, the CPU 101 executes output processing to output various commands and information necessary for the presentation set in RAM 103 during the start gate switch processing in step S2, the special symbol processing in step S4, the large prize gate processing in step S6, the prize ball processing in step S8, etc. to the presentation control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300. Each time a gaming ball enters the first start gate 45, the second start gate 47, the first large prize gate 50, the second large prize gate 56, or the regular prize gate 43, the CPU 101 sets a winning command in RAM 103 to notify the respective prize gate that the gaming ball has entered, and outputs the winning command to the presentation control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300.

[Start switch processing]
Fig. 10 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the start port switch processing in step S2 of Fig. 9. The start port switch processing in step S2 of Fig. 9 will be described below with reference to Fig. 10.

First, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45 based on the output signal from the first start hole switch 45a. If the determination in step S201 is YES, processing proceeds to step S202; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S207.

In step S202, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit Umax1 ("4" in this embodiment) of the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol lottery from the ROM 102, and determines whether the number of reserved symbols U1 for the first special symbol lottery stored in the RAM 103 is less than the upper limit Umax1. If the determination in step S202 is YES, the process proceeds to step S203; if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, the CPU 101 updates the value of the reserved number U1 stored in RAM 103 by adding 1 to the value. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in RAM 103 to notify the presentation control unit 400 that a gaming ball has won in the first starting hole 45. This winning command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in Figure 9. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the CPU 101 obtains a set of random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) to be used for the first special symbol lottery, etc. Then, processing proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, CPU 101 performs a preliminary determination process and stores each set of random numbers (game information) obtained in step S204 in chronological order in RAM 103. Specifically, CPU 101 determines in advance whether the result of the first special pattern lottery using this jackpot random number will be a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed, etc., based on whether the jackpot random number, etc., of the random number set, such as the jackpot random number obtained in the most recent processing of step S204, matches a predetermined value, etc., stored in ROM 102. In other words, the determination necessary to execute a look-ahead preview effect or a hold change preview effect (hold change effect) is determined in advance prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. 11, which will be described later. If a small jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the game ball passes through the specific area 224 (see FIG. 2) with a high probability in the small jackpot game, resulting in a big jackpot. However, since there is no small jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in this embodiment, the preliminary determination process of step S205 does not perform a preliminary determination of whether or not a small jackpot has occurred. Thereafter, each set of random numbers used in the preliminary determination (reserved data for the first special symbol lottery) is stored in RAM 103 in chronological order. Each time the value of the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol lottery is decremented by one in the process of step S406 of FIG. 11 (described later), the random number sets stored in RAM 103 are deleted one by one, starting with the most recently stored set. Therefore, for example, if the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol lottery is "3," the random number sets from the most recent three times obtained by the process of step S204 are stored in RAM 103 in chronological order. Processing then proceeds to step S206.

In step S206, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a first reserved number increase command notifying that the reserved number for the first special symbol lottery has increased by one. Here, this first reserved number increase command includes information indicating the result of the preliminary determination made in the processing of step S205 (hereinafter referred to as "preliminary determination information"). Note that by outputting the first reserved number increase command including this preliminary determination information by the output processing of step S9 in FIG. 9, the lottery results for the reserved number for the first special symbol lottery are notified from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400 before the symbol variation in the first special symbol lottery begins. Then, processing proceeds to step S207.

In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether a gaming ball has entered the second start port 47 based on the output signal from the second start port switch 47a. If the determination in step S207 is YES, processing proceeds to step S208; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S3 (gate switch processing) in Figure 9.

In step S208, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit Umax2 ("4" in this embodiment) of the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol lottery from the ROM 102, and determines whether the number of reserved symbols U2 for the second special symbol lottery stored in the RAM 103 is less than the upper limit Umax2. If the determination in step S208 is YES, the process proceeds to step S209; if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch processing) in Figure 8.

In step S209, the CPU 101 updates the value of the reserved number U2 stored in RAM 103 by adding 1 to the value. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in RAM 103 to notify the presentation control unit 400 that a gaming ball has won in the second starting hole 47. This winning command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in Figure 9. Then, the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, the CPU 101 obtains a set of random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) to be used for the second special pattern lottery, etc. Then, processing proceeds to step S211.

In step S211, CPU 101 performs a preliminary determination process and stores each set of random numbers (game information) obtained in step S210 in chronological order in RAM 103. Specifically, CPU 101 determines in advance whether the result of the second special pattern lottery using this jackpot random number will be a jackpot or small jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed, etc., based on whether the jackpot random number, etc., of the random number set, such as the jackpot random number obtained in the most recent processing of step S210, matches a predetermined value, etc., stored in ROM 102. In other words, the determination necessary to execute a look-ahead preview effect or a hold change preview effect (hold change effect) is determined in advance prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. 11, which will be described later. If a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, the game ball will likely pass through the specific area 224 (see FIG. 2) during the small win game, resulting in a big win. Therefore, the preliminary determination process in step S211 also determines whether or not a small win has occurred. Then, each set of random numbers used in the preliminary determination (reserved data for the second special symbol lottery) is stored in RAM 103 in chronological order. Each time the reserved number U2 for the second special symbol lottery is decremented by one in step S404 (see FIG. 11 ), the random number sets stored in RAM 103 are deleted one by one, starting with the most recently stored set. For example, if the reserved number U2 for the second special symbol lottery is "3," the random number sets obtained by the three most recent processing steps in step S210 are stored in RAM 103 in chronological order. Then, processing proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a second reserved number increase command notifying that the reserved number for the second special symbol lottery has increased by one. Here, this second reserved number increase command includes information (preliminary judgment information) indicating the result of the preliminary judgment made in the processing of step S211. Note that by outputting the second reserved number increase command including this preliminary judgment information by the output processing of step S9 in Figure 9, the lottery results for the reserved number for the second special symbol lottery are notified from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400 before the symbol fluctuation in the second special symbol lottery begins. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S3 (gate switch processing) in Figure 9.

[Special pattern processing]
Fig. 11 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S4 of Fig. 9. The special symbol processing in step S4 of Fig. 9 will be described below with reference to Fig. 11.

First, in step S401, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether the gaming machine 1 is currently in a big win game or a small win game based on information stored in the RAM 103 (for example, information based on flags). In other words, it determines whether the gaming machine 1 is currently in a big win game (special game) that is executed when a special symbol lottery is won, or a small win game that is executed when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery. If the determination in step S401 is YES, processing proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol processing) in Figure 9; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S402.

In step S402, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is currently displaying a changing special symbol. Note that the period during which the special symbol is displayed includes the specified period of time (specified time: 0.5 seconds) that is set immediately after the special symbol stops changing. If the determination in step S402 is YES, processing proceeds to step S411; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the CPU 101 determines whether the reserved number U2 stored in the RAM 103 is 1 or greater (i.e., whether the second special symbol lottery is reserved). If the determination in step S403 is YES, the process proceeds to step S404; if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S404, CPU 101 updates the pending number U2 stored in RAM 103 by subtracting 1 from the value. At the same time, CPU 101 reads out the earliest stored random number set among those acquired and stored in steps S210 and S211 of FIG. 10 and stored in RAM 103, and deletes it from RAM 103. Then, processing proceeds to step S407.

On the other hand, in step S405, the CPU 101 determines whether the reserved number U1 stored in RAM 103 is 1 or greater (i.e., whether the first special symbol lottery is reserved). If the determination in step S405 is YES, processing proceeds to step S406; if the determination is NO, there is no special symbol lottery to be executed, and processing proceeds to step S415.

In step S406, CPU 101 updates the pending number U1 stored in RAM 103 by subtracting 1 from the value. At that time, CPU 101 also reads out the random number set that was stored earliest among the random number sets acquired and stored in steps S204 and S205 of FIG. 10 and stored in RAM 103, and deletes it from RAM 103. Then, processing proceeds to step S407.

By performing the above steps S403 to S406, the second special symbol lottery will be executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery.

In step S407, CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss. Specifically, when executing step S407 following step S404, CPU 101 determines whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a minor jackpot (which can also be considered a specific miss that is beneficial to the player), or a miss, based on whether the jackpot random number read from RAM 103 in step S404 matches the jackpot winning value stored in ROM 102. On the other hand, when executing step S407 following step S406, CPU 101 determines whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss, based on whether the jackpot random number read from RAM 103 in step S406 matches the jackpot winning value stored in ROM 102. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a small win is only provided in the second special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning a small win is, for example, 1/10. If the CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, it sets a miss symbol representing a miss in the special symbol lottery in RAM 103 as the special symbol stop symbol in the setting information. On the other hand, if the CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot based on whether the symbol random number read from RAM 103, together with the jackpot random number used in this determination, matches any of the predetermined values stored in ROM 102. In this embodiment, as an example, there are a time-saving jackpot, in which a time-saving game state is set after a jackpot game, and a normal jackpot, in which a normal game state is set after a jackpot game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is assigned a 50% chance of a time-saving jackpot and a 50% chance of a normal jackpot, while the second special symbol lottery is assigned a 100% chance of a time-saving jackpot. The time-saving game state, which is set after the execution of a time-saving jackpot game, continues for up to 100 spins (until 100 special symbol lotteries have been executed) (unless the game ends with the next jackpot). Then, the CPU 101 sets information about a jackpot or minor jackpot, and, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot symbol indicating the type of jackpot, in RAM 103 as information about the stopped special symbol in the setting information. Processing then proceeds to step S408.

[Variation pattern selection process]
In step S408, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process. Specifically, in step S408, the CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern for each special symbol lottery by using the variation pattern determination tables HT1-1 and HT1-2 shown in Figures 12 and 13 when in a normal game mode (non-time-saving mode), and by using the variation pattern determination tables HT2-1 and HT2-2 shown in Figures 14 and 15 when in a time-saving game mode. Here, this variation pattern is a special symbol variation time, which is the time from when the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device (60, 61) to when it is displayed as a stop (determined stop display), and this special symbol variation time is synchronized with the execution time of the notification effect and is the same time as the execution time of the notification effect. In the following, the fluctuation pattern determination tables HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1 and HT2-2 may be simply referred to as HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1 and HT2-2.

First, we will explain the case where a variation pattern is selected using HT1-1 and HT1-2 shown in Figures 12 and 13 during normal game play (non-time-saving mode). Figure 12 is a table used to determine a variation pattern when a first special symbol lottery is executed in step S407 during normal game play (non-time-saving mode). Figure 13 is a table used to determine a variation pattern when a second special symbol lottery is executed in step S407 during normal game play (non-time-saving mode).

[Non-time shortening state / variable pattern selection process in first special symbol lottery]
Below, using Figure 12, we will explain how to determine the variation pattern when the first special pattern lottery is executed in the processing of step S407 in the normal game state (non-time-saving state).

In step S408, if the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is a jackpot, it determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number. Specifically, the CPU 101 determines a fluctuation pattern based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number (any one of 0 to 299) read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 matches any of the random number values assigned to each fluctuation pattern in the "jackpot" portion of HT1-1. For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is "92," the CPU 101 determines "2" as the fluctuation pattern because this is included in the random number value range "20 to 299" assigned to fluctuation pattern "2" in the "jackpot" portion of HT1-1. Here, as shown in HT1-1, the variation patterns "6," "4," and "2" in the "jackpot" portion correspond to the variation times of the special symbols (i.e., the execution times of the notification effect) of "15 seconds," "60 seconds," and "90 seconds," respectively, and also correspond to the notification effect presentation pattern types "reach hit," "SP hit," and "SPSP hit." Furthermore, a "reach hit" is a type in which a jackpot occurs after a reach is established, an "SP hit" is a type in which a jackpot occurs after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SP reach, and an "SPSP hit" is a type in which a jackpot occurs after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SP reach.

Note that a reach (reach effect) is an effect in which, for example, when the last of multiple decorative symbols to stop is displayed (temporarily stopped) as a specific symbol during a notification effect, it creates the expectation that it will combine with other symbols that are already stopped (temporarily stopped) to form a jackpot pattern. Typically, the decorative symbols on the right and left sides stop (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol (e.g., 7), and the display changes to create the expectation that the central decorative symbol that stops last will also stop (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol (e.g., 7) (i.e., a double digit 777). This reach state may also be referred to as a reach state. Furthermore, an SP reach (SP reach effect), commonly referred to as a super reach or special reach, is an effect that is executed in a reach state and creates even greater expectations of a jackpot than the above reaches, such as a video of a protagonist character fighting an enemy character. Additionally, an SPSP reach (SPSP reach effect), commonly known as a super super reach or special special reach, is performed in a reach state and is an effect that creates even greater anticipation of a jackpot than an SP reach, such as a video effect in which the main character fights an enemy boss character.

Also, in step S408, if the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a miss in the jackpot determination process of step S407, it determines the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) based on the number of reserved symbols (U1) for the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number.

Specifically, when the reserved number for the first special symbol lottery is "0," CPU 101 determines whether the reach random number (any one of 0 to 99) read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is within the reach random number range "0 to 79" or the reach random number range "80 to 99" for the "miss" reserved number "0" portion of HT1-1.

Then, if the read-out reach random number is within the reach random number range of "0 to 79," the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern to be "7." Here, as shown in HT1-1, variation pattern "7" corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol of "12 seconds," and also corresponds to the type of notification effect pattern of "instant miss."

On the other hand, if the read-out reach random number falls within the reach random number value range of "80 to 99," the CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation time) based on which of the fluctuation pattern random number ranges assigned to each fluctuation pattern in the reach random number value range "80 to 99" portion of HT1-1 the fluctuation pattern random number (any one of 0 to 299) read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 falls within. For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is "280," the CPU 101 determines "1" as the fluctuation pattern because this falls within the fluctuation pattern random number value range "244 to 285" assigned to fluctuation pattern "1." As shown in HT1-1, the variation patterns "5," "3," and "1" in the reach random number range "80 to 99" of HT1-1 correspond to the variation times of the special symbols of "15 seconds," "60 seconds," and "90 seconds," respectively, and also correspond to the notification effect pattern types "reach miss," "SP miss," and "SPSP miss." A "reach miss" is a type that misses after a reach is established, an "SP miss" is a type that misses after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SP reach, and an "SPSP miss" is a type that misses after a reach is established and eventually develops into an SP reach.

In addition, when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "1," "2," or "3, 4," the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern in essentially the same way as when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "0." However, when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "1," "2," or "3, 4," as shown in HT1-1, compared to when the reserved number for the first special pattern lottery is "0," variation pattern "8" is added, in which the notification effect pattern type is "instant miss" and the special pattern variation time is "12 seconds," and the allocation of reach random numbers and variation pattern random numbers is also different.

[Non-time shortening state / variable pattern selection process in second special pattern lottery]
13, the determination of the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the processing of step S407 in the normal game state (non-time-saving state) will be described below. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing processing that is basically the same as the variation pattern determination processing described using FIG. 12. However, the CPU 101 differs in that, in the variation pattern determination processing described using FIG. 12, the CPU 101 processes the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1, whereas in this variation pattern determination processing, the CPU 101 processes the second special symbol lottery using HT1-2 shown in FIG. 13. Furthermore, in HT1-2 shown in FIG. 13, the "reserved number of the first special symbol lottery" is replaced with the "reserved number of the second special symbol lottery" compared to HT1-1 shown in FIG. 12, and a variation pattern for the case of a small win is added. Furthermore, if it is determined that a small win has occurred in the jackpot determination process of step S407, in step S408 the CPU 101 determines a fluctuation pattern based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number (any one of 0 to 299) read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in this jackpot determination process matches any one of the random number values assigned to each fluctuation pattern in the "small win" portion of HT1-2. For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number read from RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S407 is "2", the CPU 101 determines "11" as the fluctuation pattern because this is included in the random number value "0 to 3" assigned to the fluctuation pattern "11" in the "small win" portion of HT1-2. Here, as shown in HT1-2, the variation patterns of the "small hit" part, "11", "10", and "9", respectively correspond to the variation time of the special pattern (i.e., the execution time of the notification effect) of "15 seconds", "60 seconds", and "90 seconds", and also correspond to the types of presentation patterns of the notification effect, "reach hit", "SP hit", and "SPSP hit".

[Time-saving state / Variation pattern selection process in first special symbol lottery]
14, the determination of the variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the processing of step S407 in the time-shortened game state (time-shortened state) will be described below. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing processing that is basically the same as the processing of the variation pattern determination described using FIG. 12. However, the CPU 101 differs in that, in the processing of the variation pattern determination described using FIG. 12, the CPU 101 processes the first special symbol lottery in the normal game state (non-time-shortened state) using HT1-1, whereas in the processing of the variation pattern determination described using FIG. 14, the CPU 101 processes the first special symbol lottery in the time-shortened game state (time-shortened state). Here, in HT1-1 shown in Fig. 12, when the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is between "1" and "4", it is possible to determine the variation pattern "8" (corresponding to an immediate miss with a variation time of "2 seconds"), whereas HT2-1 shown in Fig. 14 is different in that it cannot determine the variation pattern "8" even when the reserved number is between "1" and "4". In other words, even when the reserved number of the first special symbol lottery is between "1" and "4", the short variation time of "2 seconds" is never determined.

[Time-saving state / Variable pattern selection process in second special symbol lottery]
15, the determination of the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the processing of step S407 in the time-shortened game state (time-shortened state) will be described below. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing processing that is essentially the same as the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. 13. However, the CPU 101 differs in that, in the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. 13, the CPU 101 processes the second special symbol lottery in the time-shortened game state (time-shortened state) using HT1-2, whereas in this variation pattern determination processing, the CPU 101 processes the second special symbol lottery in the time-shortened game state (time-shortened state) using HT2-2 shown in FIG. 15. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, the allocation of reach random numbers and variation pattern random numbers is the same for HT2-2 and HT1-2 shown in FIG. 13 when the reserved number is "1" to "4," and the variation pattern corresponding to "no reach" is only "8."

The information about the variation pattern determined in step S408 (i.e., information about the execution time of the notification effect and the type of effect pattern) is set in RAM 103 as setting information. Processing then proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, the CPU 101 generates an alarm effect start command including the setting information set by the jackpot determination process in step S407 and the setting information set by the variation pattern selection process in step S408, and sets this command in RAM 103. Here, the alarm effect start command is a command that instructs the presentation control unit 400 to start an alarm effect using the image display unit (70, 71) and speaker 9, etc. The setting information included in the alarm effect start command also includes information indicating whether the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery has been executed. For this reason, it can be said that there are different types of alarm effect start commands depending on the information included. The CPU 101 also sets a game status notification command indicating the current game status (e.g., time-saving game status) in RAM 103. The above-mentioned alarm effect start command and game status notification command are sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG. 9. Processing then proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, the CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 based on the setting information included in the notification effect start command set in the processing of step S409. Then, processing proceeds to step S411.

In step S411, the CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol change time indicated by the change pattern set in the change pattern selection process in step S408 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol change display in step S410. If the determination in step S411 is YES, processing proceeds to step S412; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol processing) in Figure 9.

In step S412, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a notification effect stop command (pattern determination command) that instructs the image display units (70, 71) and the like to end the notification effect. Then, processing proceeds to step S413. The notification effect stop command set in step S412 is sent to the effect control unit 400 by the output processing of step S9 in Figure 9.

In step S413, the CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, which began in the processing of step S410, and causes the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to display the symbol indicating the special symbol lottery result in a static state for the specified time (0.5 seconds). Then, processing proceeds to step S414.

In step S414, CPU 101 executes processing during the stoppage. Specifically, if CPU 101 determines that a jackpot has occurred in the jackpot determination process of step S407, it changes the information stored in RAM 103 (e.g., information based on a flag) to indicate that a jackpot game is currently being played, and sets an opening command in RAM 103 that instructs the start of a jackpot game presentation. Also, if CPU 101 determines that a small jackpot has occurred in the jackpot determination process of step S407, it changes the information stored in RAM 103 (e.g., information based on a flag) to indicate that a small jackpot game is currently being played, and sets an opening command in RAM 103 that instructs the start of a small jackpot game presentation. The opening command for the big win game and small win game is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in Figure 9 when the specified time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the stopped display of the special symbol began in the process of step S413, and the big win game presentation or small win game presentation begins.

In step S415, CPU 101 determines whether a customer waiting command and a game status notification command indicating the current game status have already been sent in the processing of step S416 (described below). Here, the customer waiting command is a command that is sent when there are no pending special pattern lottery draws at the time the stopped display of special patterns has ended, and is a command that notifies that a state has been reached in which the notification effect announcing the results of the special pattern lottery draw is not being executed (the so-called customer waiting state). If the determination in step S415 is YES, processing proceeds to step S5 (normal pattern processing) in Figure 9; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S416.

In step S416, the CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command and a game status notification command in RAM 103. This customer waiting command and game status notification command are sent to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and a predetermined stop effect (e.g., a customer waiting effect in which decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state) is initiated based on the customer waiting command. Note that the customer waiting effect begins when a predetermined time (e.g., 90 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the above-mentioned stop effect. Here, the customer waiting effect is, for example, an effect in which a video related to the content (anime, story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display unit (70, 71), or an effect in which, for example, a part of a predetermined effect executed during play (e.g., an SP reach effect) is displayed on the image display unit. Processing then proceeds to step S5 in FIG. 9 (normal symbol processing).

[Big prize slot processing]
Figures 16 to 18 are examples of detailed flowcharts of the special prize opening process in step S6 of Figure 9. The special prize opening process in step S6 of Figure 9 will be described below with reference to Figures 16 to 18.

First, in step S601, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether a small win game is in progress based on information (e.g., flag information) stored in RAM 103. If the determination in step S601 is YES, processing proceeds to step S602; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S602, the CPU 101 determines whether the small win game is currently in the opening stage based on information stored in RAM 103. If the determination in step S602 is YES, processing proceeds to step S603; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S606.

In step S603, the CPU 101 determines whether the set opening time, which specifies the execution time of the opening of the small win game, has elapsed. If the determination in step S603 is YES, processing proceeds to step S604. If the determination is NO, the opening has not ended, so processing proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S604, the CPU 101 controls the first large prize opening opening/closing unit 51b to begin opening control of the first large prize opening 50. This process starts a round of small prize play (round play) and initiates the opening operation (one opening operation) of the first large prize opening 50. Note that the number of rounds executed in the small prize play is one. Processing then proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, the CPU 101 sets a round start notification command in the RAM 103 to notify the start of a round of small win game (start of round game). This round start notification command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in Figure 9, and the round presentation corresponding to the round of small win game will begin. Then, processing proceeds to step S607.

In step S606, the CPU 101 determines whether the small win game is ending based on the information stored in RAM 103. If the determination in step S606 is YES, the process proceeds to step S619; if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the CPU 101 determines whether it is time to open the specific area 224 (see Figure 2) inside the first large prize opening 50 (first variable prize section 49). This timing occurs when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the first large prize opening 50 was opened in step S604. If the determination in step S607 is YES, processing proceeds to step S608; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S609.

In step S608, the CPU 101 controls the specific area opening/closing unit 150 to open the opening/closing member 221, thereby commencing specific area opening control to allow the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 224. Then, processing proceeds to step S609.

In step S609, the CPU 101 determines whether a specified opening control time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening control of the specific area 224 was started in the processing of step S608. In other words, it determines whether the specified time (e.g., 5 seconds) for opening the specific area 224 has elapsed. If the determination in step S609 is YES, the process proceeds to step S610; if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S611.

In step S610, the CPU 101 controls the specific area opening/closing unit 150 to close the opening/closing member 221, thereby ending the opening control of the specific area 224. Then, processing proceeds to step S611.

In step S611, the CPU 101 determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224 based on the output signal from the specific area switch 151. If the determination in step S611 is YES, the process proceeds to step S612; if the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S612, the CPU 101 sets the occurrence of a time-saving jackpot, and also sets in RAM 103 a specific area passage notification command indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224. This specific area passage notification command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in Figure 9, and a presentation is executed to notify that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224 and a time-saving jackpot has occurred. Processing then proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, the CPU 101 determines whether a gaming ball has entered the first major prize opening 50 based on the output signal from the first major prize opening switch 50a. If the determination in step S613 is YES, processing proceeds to step S614; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S615.

In step S614, the CPU 101 updates the number of winning game balls C stored in RAM 103 by incrementing it by one. By executing the process of step S614 each time a game ball enters the first large prize slot 50, the total number of game balls that have entered the first large prize slot 50 during a round of small prize play (number of winning game balls C) is cumulatively stored in RAM 103. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in RAM 103 to notify the presentation control unit 400 that a game ball has entered the first large prize slot 50. This winning command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the winning process instruction of step S129 in FIG. 21 is executed. Processing then proceeds to step S615.

In step S615, the CPU 101 determines whether the specified opening control time (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the opening control of the first large prize opening 50 was initiated in the processing of step S604. If the determination in step S615 is YES, processing proceeds to step S617; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S616.

In step S616, the CPU 101 determines whether the number of winning game balls C in the small win game round has reached the upper limit number of winning game balls Cmax ("10" in this embodiment), which determines the timing at which the first large prize opening 50 is blocked. If the determination in step S616 is YES, processing proceeds to step S617; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S617, the CPU 101 controls the first large prize opening opening/closing unit 51b to end the opening control of the first large prize opening 50 that began in step S604. In this way, the CPU 101 closes the first large prize opening 50 during a round of small win play when the total number of game balls (number of winning balls C) detected by the first large prize opening switch 50a reaches 10 (Cmax) within 29.5 seconds since the first large prize opening 50 was opened, or when 29.5 seconds have passed since the first large prize opening 50 was opened. Processing then proceeds to step S618.

In step S618, the CPU 101 sets in RAM 103 an ending command that instructs the presentation control unit 400 to execute the ending presentation for the small win game. The ending command set in this process is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by step S9 (output process) of FIG. 9. In this embodiment, the game ball passes through the specific area 224 with a high probability during the small win game, and in most cases, the time-limited jackpot jackpot game is executed immediately after the small win game. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 224 during the small win game and the time-limited jackpot game is executed, for example, the presentation control unit 400 executes the presentation for the small win game and the presentation for the time-limited jackpot jackpot game as a single (integrated) jackpot game presentation. In this case, for example, the opening effect, round effect, and ending effect of the small win game are executed as the opening effect of the time-saving jackpot game, the round effect of the first round, and the interval effect at the end of the first round, respectively. Processing then proceeds to step S619.

In step S619, the CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined set ending time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed. If the determination in step S619 is YES, processing proceeds to step S620; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S620, the CPU 101 ends the small win game. Specifically, the CPU 101 cancels the setting information (e.g., flag information) stored in RAM 103 that indicates that a small win game is in progress, and ends the small win game. Processing then proceeds to step S621.

In step S621, the CPU 101 determines whether a time-saving jackpot has been set to occur in step S612. In other words, it determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224. If the determination in step S621 is YES, processing proceeds to step S622; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S651 in FIG. 17.

In step S622, the CPU 101 sets in RAM 103 an opening command that instructs the output control unit 400 to execute an opening effect for a time-limited jackpot jackpot game. The opening command set in this process is sent to the effect control unit 400 in step S9 (output process) of FIG. 9. As described above, if a game ball passes through the specific area 224 during a small jackpot game and a time-limited jackpot game is executed, for example, the opening effect, round effect, and ending effect of the small jackpot game are executed as the opening effect of the time-limited jackpot jackpot game effect, the round effect of the first round, and the interval effect at the end of the first round, respectively. In this case, for example, the opening effect of the time-limited jackpot jackpot game is executed as (the latter half of) the interval effect at the end of the first round of this jackpot game. Processing then proceeds to step S651 of FIG. 17.

By processing steps S601 to S622 described above, a small win game is executed, and during the small win game, there is a high probability that the game ball will pass through the specific area 224, resulting in a time-saving jackpot.

In step S651 of FIG. 17, the CPU 101 determines whether a jackpot game is currently being played, based on information stored in RAM 103. If the determination in step S651 is YES, processing proceeds to step S652; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S7 of FIG. 9 (second start port opening/closing processing).

In step S652, the CPU 101 determines whether the opening of the jackpot game is in progress based on information stored in RAM 103. If the determination in step S652 is YES, processing proceeds to step S653; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S659.

In step S653, the CPU 101 determines whether the set opening time, which specifies the execution time of the opening of the jackpot game, has elapsed. If the determination in step S653 is YES, processing proceeds to step S654. If the determination is NO, the opening has not ended, so processing proceeds to step S7 in Figure 9 (second start port opening/closing processing).

In step S654, the CPU 101 sets the total number of rounds Rmax in the jackpot game and the operation pattern of the second large prize opening 56 during the jackpot game, and sets this setting information in RAM 103. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the number of rounds included in the jackpot game (Rmax: "15" in this embodiment) and the operation pattern of the second large prize opening 56 during the jackpot game, and sets this setting information in RAM 103. The processing of step S654 sets the total number of rounds Rmax in the jackpot game, the interval time between rounds during the jackpot game, the set ending time which is the time for the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game, etc. Then, processing proceeds to step S655.

In step S605, the CPU 101 resets the number C of winning game balls in the second large winning slot 56, which is stored in the RAM 103, to "0." Processing then proceeds to step S656.

In step S656, the CPU 101 updates the number of rounds R of the jackpot game stored in RAM 103 by adding 1 to the value. Then, processing proceeds to step S657.

In step S657, the CPU 101 controls the second large prize opening opening/closing unit 57b to begin opening control of the second large prize opening 56. This process starts a round of jackpot play (round play) and initiates the opening operation (one opening operation) of the second large prize opening 56. Then, the process proceeds to step S658.

In step S658, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 a round start notification command that notifies the start of a round of jackpot play (start of round play). This round start notification command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the round presentation of jackpot play begins. Note that this round start notification command includes information indicating the total number of rounds Rmax set in step S654 and information indicating the current number of rounds R updated by the process of step S656. Processing then proceeds to step S662.

In step S659, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game interval is in progress based on the information stored in RAM 103. If the determination in step S659 is YES, processing proceeds to step S660; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S661.

In step S660, the CPU 101 determines whether the set interval time during jackpot play, which was set in the processing of step S654, has elapsed since the second large prize opening 56 was closed at the end of the previous round during jackpot play. If the determination in step S660 is YES, it is time to start the next round during jackpot play, so processing proceeds to step S655. If the determination is NO, it is not time to start the next round during jackpot play, so processing proceeds to step S7 in Figure 9 (second start opening/closing processing).

In step S661, the CPU 101 determines, based on information stored in RAM 103, whether the gaming machine 1 is currently executing the ending presentation of a jackpot game. If the determination in step S661 is YES, processing proceeds to step S671 in FIG. 18; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S662.

In step S662, the CPU 101 determines that a jackpot game round is in progress and determines whether a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 56 based on the output signal from the second large prize opening switch 56a. If the determination in step S662 is YES, processing proceeds to step S663; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S664.

In step S663, the CPU 101 updates the number of winning game balls C stored in RAM 103 by incrementing it by one. By executing the process of step S663 each time a game ball wins the second large winning slot 56, the total number of game balls that have won the second large winning slot 56 during one round of jackpot play (number of winning game balls C) is cumulatively stored in RAM 103. The CPU 101 also sets a winning command in RAM 103 to notify the presentation control unit 400 that a game ball has won the second large winning slot 56. This winning command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, and the winning process instruction of step S129 in FIG. 21 is executed. The process then proceeds to step S664.

In step S664, the CPU 101 determines whether the specified opening control time (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the opening control of the second large prize opening 56 was initiated in the processing of step S657. If the determination in step S664 is YES, processing proceeds to step S666; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S665.

In step S665, the CPU 101 determines whether the number of winning game balls C in the current round has reached the upper limit number of game balls Cmax ("10" in this embodiment), which determines the timing at which the second large winning opening 56 is closed. If the determination in step S665 is YES, processing proceeds to step S666; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S7 in Figure 9 (second start opening/closing processing).

In step S666, the CPU 101 controls the second large prize opening opening/closing unit 57b to end the control of opening the second large prize opening 56 that began in step S657. In this way, the CPU 101 closes the second large prize opening 56 in each round during a jackpot game when the total number of game balls (number of prizes C) detected by the second large prize opening switch 56a reaches 10 (Cmax) within 29.5 seconds of opening the second large prize opening 56, or when 29.5 seconds have passed since opening the second large prize opening 56. Processing then proceeds to step S667.

In step S667, the CPU 101 sets a round end notification command in the RAM 103 to notify the player that the round of jackpot play has ended (end of round play). This round end notification command is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in Figure 9, and the round presentation of the jackpot play ends. Processing then proceeds to step S668.

In step S668, the CPU 101 determines whether the current number of rounds R stored in RAM 103 has reached the maximum number of rounds Rmax for jackpot play set in the processing of step S654. If the determination in step S668 is YES, processing proceeds to step S669 in Figure 18; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S7 in Figure 9 (second start port opening/closing processing).

In step S669 of FIG. 18, the CPU 101 resets the number of rounds R of the jackpot game stored in RAM 103 to "0." Processing then proceeds to step S670.

In step S670, the CPU 101 sets in RAM 103 an ending command that instructs the presentation control unit 400 to execute an ending presentation for the jackpot game. The ending command set in this process is sent to the presentation control unit 400 by step S9 (output process) of Figure 9. Note that this ending command sent corresponds to the jackpot pattern (i.e., the type of jackpot) and the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game ends, and the presentation control unit 400 controls the presentation after the ending presentation ends (after the jackpot game presentation ends) based on this ending command. Specifically, when an ending command corresponding to a jackpot pattern indicating a time-saving jackpot is sent, the presentation control unit 400 executes a notification presentation in a presentation mode indicating the time-saving game state after the jackpot game presentation ends based on the ending command. Furthermore, if an ending command corresponding to a jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot is sent, the presentation control unit 400 executes a notification presentation in a presentation mode indicating normal game mode after the jackpot game presentation ends based on the ending command. Processing then proceeds to step S671.

In step S671, the CPU 101 determines whether the set ending time set in the processing of step S654 in Figure 17 has elapsed since the ending command was set in RAM 103 in step S670. If the determination in step S671 is YES, processing proceeds to step S672; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S7 in Figure 7 (second start port opening/closing processing).

In step S672, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot game that was being executed. Specifically, the CPU 101 cancels the setting information (e.g., flag information) stored in RAM 103 that indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and ends the jackpot game. Processing then proceeds to step S623.

In step S673, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process. Specifically, when the jackpot game ends in step S622, the CPU 101 switches the game state (i.e., switches the opening setting of the variable start unit 46, etc.) depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern) of the current jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S7 in Figure 9 (second start port opening/closing process).

The jackpot game is executed by the processing of steps S651 to S673 described above.

[Timer interrupt processing by the production control unit]
Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the performance control unit 400. The timer interrupt processing performed in the performance control unit 400 will be described below with reference to Fig. 19. During normal operation, except in special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the performance control unit 400 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in Fig. 19 every fixed time (4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed by the performance control unit 400, which will be explained based on the flowcharts in Fig. 19 and subsequent figures, is executed based on a program stored in ROM 402.

First, in step S11, the CPU 401 of the performance control unit 400 receives the various commands output from the main control unit 100 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 9, sets the performance content according to the received commands, and executes command reception processing to set in RAM 403 the various commands used to instruct the image and sound control unit 500 and lamp control unit 600 to perform the performance of the set performance content. This command reception processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

Next, in step S11-1, the CPU 401 sets effects in response to the player operating the effect button 16, etc., and executes an operation input process to set various commands in the RAM 403 to instruct the image and sound control unit 500 and lamp control unit 600 to execute the effects, etc. that have been set.

Next, in step S12, the CPU 401 executes an output process to output the various commands set in the RAM 403 in the processes of steps S11 and S11-1 to the image/sound control unit 500 and the lamp control unit 600. As a result of this process, the various effects and the like determined to be executed in the processes of steps S11 and S11-1 are executed by the image display units (70, 71), speaker 9, panel lamp 10a, etc. under the execution control of the image/sound control unit 500 and the lamp control unit 600.

Note that each time the above-mentioned timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 401 performs a random number update process that updates the various effect random numbers used to determine the effects. In this random number update process, as with the random number update process of step S1 in Figure 9, a loop counter is typically used, and its count value (updated random number value) returns to 0 again after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99) (i.e., it cycles). Also, in this random number update process, the counter for each effect random number randomly updates its initial value (the value that serves as the starting point for the cycle) after each cycle. This makes it possible to avoid synchronization of the counter values (count values) between these effect random numbers.

[Command reception process]
Figures 20 and 21 are examples of detailed flowcharts of the command reception process in step S11 in Figure 19. The command reception process in step S11 in Figure 19 will be described below with reference to Figures 20 and 21.

First, in step S111 of FIG. 20, the CPU 401 of the performance control unit 400 determines whether or not it has received a hold number increase command (first hold number increase command or second hold number increase command) from the main control unit 100 (see steps S206 and S212 of FIG. 10). If the determination in step S111 is YES, processing proceeds to step S112; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S114.

In step S112, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 to perform a hold icon display process, such as displaying an additional hold icon indicating a hold for a special symbol lottery on the image display unit, in response to the hold number increase command received in step S111. The displayed hold icons are erased in sequence when the notification effect is initiated based on the process in step S115, which will be described later. This instruction to the image and sound control unit 500 is given by setting a command in RAM 403. When the CPU 401 receives a first hold number increase command, it accumulatively stores in RAM 403 one piece of data indicating the hold for the first special symbol lottery (first hold data) in chronological order. Meanwhile, when the CPU 401 receives a second hold number increase command, it accumulatively stores in RAM 403 one piece of data indicating the hold for the second special symbol lottery (second hold data) in chronological order. At this time, the CPU 401 extracts the advance judgment information included in the hold number increase command, includes it in each of the above-mentioned hold data, and stores it in RAM 403. Processing then proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, the CPU 401 performs a pre-reading preview effect setting process. Specifically, if the number of reserved special symbol lotteries (the number of reserved data items) stored in RAM 403 is two or more, including the reserved items added in step S112, the CPU 401 determines by lottery or other means whether to execute a pre-reading preview effect based on the advance determination information most recently stored in RAM 403 (i.e., included in the most recent reserved data). For example, the CPU 401 obtains a pre-reading random number (effect random number) in each of the following cases: when the advance determination information indicates a "jackpot," when the advance determination information indicates a "miss" and a "reach effect" (reach and miss), or when the advance determination information indicates a "miss" and a "reach effect not present" (reach and miss), and when the pre-reading random number matches a predetermined pre-reading winning value, the CPU 401 determines to execute a pre-reading preview effect. Furthermore, for example, when the pre-determination information indicates a "small win" that leads to a big win, indicates a "miss" and a "reach effect" (reach miss), or indicates a "miss" and no "reach effect" (reach miss), the CPU 401 obtains a look-ahead random number (effect random number), and if the look-ahead random number matches a predetermined look-ahead winning value, it decides to execute a look-ahead preview effect.

The number of pre-read winning values may be set differently depending on whether the pre-determination information indicates a "jackpot" or "small jackpot," a "miss with reach," or a "miss without reach." Specifically, the number of pre-read winning values for a "jackpot" or "small jackpot" may be set to be greater than the number of pre-read winning values for a "miss with reach," thereby making it easier for a pre-read preview effect to be executed in the event of a "jackpot" or "small jackpot." When a pre-determination information is determined to be executed, the CPU 401 selects, by lottery or other means, the content of the pre-read preview effect to be executed from among numerous pre-determination preview effect patterns that satisfy the conditions of the pre-determination information (such as whether a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred). In other words, the pre-determination preview effect determines the type of preview effect to be executed in each notification effect. The pre-determination preview effect may be, for example, a pre-read consecutive preview effect that can suggest the possibility of a jackpot (or small jackpot) across multiple notification effects. Processing then proceeds to step S114.

In step S114, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the notification effect start command and game status notification command set in step S409 of FIG. 11. If the determination in step S114 is YES, processing proceeds to step S115; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S116.

In step S115, the CPU 401 performs notification effect setting processing in which, in response to the notification effect start command received in the processing of step S114, it sets the effect content (effect pattern) of the notification effect to be displayed by the image display unit, etc., and instructs the image and audio control unit 500, etc., to start executing the notification effect with the set content. Here, the notification effect (variable effect; sometimes simply called "variable") is an effect that is executed by the image display unit, etc. in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and announces the result of the special pattern lottery; for example, an effect in which a decorative pattern is displayed variable, and the variable displayed decorative pattern is displayed stationary (determined stationary) to announce the result of the special pattern lottery.

Specifically, the CPU 401 analyzes the received notification effect start command and acquires the setting information contained in the notification effect start command. The CPU 401 then determines the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern contained in the acquired setting information as the effect pattern for the notification effect to be executed. For example, if the setting information contains "3" variation patterns (i.e., corresponding to the "SP Miss" effect pattern type; see FIG. 12, etc.), the CPU 401 determines, by lottery or other means, the SP reach effect to be executed from among multiple types of SP reach effects. After a reach is achieved and the determined SP reach effect is executed, the CPU 401 sets an effect pattern to notify that the special symbol lottery has been lost, and instructs the image and audio control unit 500, etc. to execute the notification effect with the set content. The CPU 501 of the image and audio control unit 500 creates a schedule for the image effects, audio effects, etc. that make up the notification effect based on the execution order and execution timing of each effect that makes up the instructed notification effect, and executes (progresses) the notification effect based on this schedule.

Note that instructions to the image and audio control unit 500 and the like are given by setting commands in RAM 403. Furthermore, if the notification effect set by this notification effect setting process is an announcement of the result of the first special symbol lottery, the CPU 401 deletes the first reserved data (oldest first reserved data) stored earliest among the first reserved data stored in chronological order in RAM 403. If the notification effect set by this notification effect setting process is an announcement of the result of the second special symbol lottery, the CPU 401 deletes the second reserved data (oldest second reserved data) stored earliest among the second reserved data stored in chronological order in RAM 403. By processing in this manner, the contents of the random number set information stored in RAM 103 of the main control unit 100 (reserved data on the main control unit 100 side) can be made to match the contents of the reserved data stored in RAM 403 of the effect control unit 400 (reserved data on the effect control unit 400 side). Processing then proceeds to step S116.

In step S116, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the notification effect stop command (symbol confirmation command) set in the processing of step S412 in FIG. 11. If the determination in step S116 is YES, processing proceeds to step S117; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S118 in FIG. 21.

In step S117, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500, etc. to end the notification effect that began in response to the processing of step S115, and finally completely stops all of the decorative symbols that were being displayed in a variable manner (including temporary stops) (displaying them as fixed stops for a specified time (0.5 seconds)), thereby announcing the results of the special symbol lottery in a dramatic manner. Note that each instruction to the image and sound control unit 500, etc. is given by setting commands in RAM 403. Processing then proceeds to step S118 in Figure 21.

In step S118 of FIG. 21, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the opening command for the small win game set in the stoppage processing of step S414 of FIG. 11. If the determination in step S118 is YES, processing proceeds to step S119; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S120.

In step S119, the CPU 401 instructs the opening effect for the small win game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and audio control unit 500 to start the opening effect for the small win game. Here, the opening effect for the small win game is an effect that notifies the player of the start of the small win game, and is, for example, an effect (notification) that displays an image and outputs audio urging the player to fire the game ball toward the first large winning slot 50 (i.e., to hit to the right). As already explained, in most cases, the time-limited jackpot game is executed immediately after the small win game. Therefore, for example, the small win game effect and the time-limited jackpot game effect may be executed as a single (integrated) jackpot game effect, and the opening effect for the small win game may be executed as the opening effect for the time-limited jackpot game effect. Processing then proceeds to step S120.

In step S120, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the small win game round start notification command set in the processing of step S605 in FIG. 16. If the determination in step S120 is YES, processing proceeds to step S121; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S122.

In step S121, the CPU 401 issues an instruction to start a round effect for small win games. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and audio control unit 500, etc., to start a round effect for small win games. Here, the round effect for small win games is an effect executed during a round of play for small win games, and is, for example, an effect (notification) that displays an effect image and outputs audio to encourage the player to pass the game ball through a specific area 224 (V area; see Figure 2) within the first large prize opening 50. Processing then proceeds to step S122.

In step S122, the CPU 401 determines whether the specific area passage notification command set in the processing of step S612 in FIG. 16 has been received. If the determination in step S122 is YES, processing proceeds to step S123; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S124.

In step S123, the CPU 401 issues a specific area passage effect instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500, etc., to execute a specific area passage effect that notifies the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224. Here, the specific area passage effect is an effect that notifies the player that a time-saving jackpot has occurred by notifying the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 224, and is an effect that displays an image in which the letter V is enlarged and a golden effect is displayed, and outputs a sound effect. Processing then proceeds to step S124.

In step S124, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the opening command for the jackpot game set in the processing of step S414 in FIG. 11 or step S622 in FIG. 16. If the determination in step S124 is YES, processing proceeds to step S125; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S126.

In step S125, the CPU 401 instructs the opening effect for the jackpot game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and audio control unit 500, etc., to start the opening effect for the jackpot game effect. Here, the opening effect for the jackpot game of a normal jackpot or a time-limited jackpot resulting from a special symbol lottery win is an effect that notifies the player of the start of the jackpot game, and is typically an image effect that prompts the player to fire the game ball toward the second large prize opening 56 (i.e., to hit it to the right). On the other hand, as already explained, the opening effect for the time-limited jackpot game that occurs when the game ball passes through the specific area 224 during a small jackpot game may be executed, for example, as (a part of) the first interval effect of the jackpot game effect (to execute the effects for the small jackpot game and the time-limited jackpot game as a single (integrated) jackpot game effect). Processing then proceeds to step S126.

In step S126, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the jackpot game round start notification command set in the processing of step S658 in FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S126 is YES, processing proceeds to step S127; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S128.

In step S127, the CPU 401 issues an instruction to start the round effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500, etc., to start the round effect processing of the jackpot game effect. Here, the round effect is an effect executed during the round of play of the jackpot game, such as an effect using an image of the main character fighting an enemy character. Then, processing proceeds to step S128.

In step S128, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received a winning command that was set in the processing of step S614 in FIG. 16 or step S663 in FIG. 17 and output by the output processing of step S9 in FIG. 9. If the determination in step S128 is YES, processing proceeds to step S129; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S130.

In step S129, the CPU 401 issues a winning processing instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500 to start winning processing. Here, the CPU 501 of the image and sound control unit 500, which has received the instruction to start winning processing from the performance control unit 400, counts the number of game balls that have entered each winning slot (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, first large winning slot 50, second large winning slot 56, regular winning slot 43) based on the winning command received via the performance control unit 400, and stores the number in RAM 503. Furthermore, when the CPU 501 receives a winning command based on a game ball entering a large prize slot (i.e., when one game ball enters a large prize slot), it adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the large prize slot, "13," to the total number of prize balls stored in RAM 503, updating it, and displays the updated total number of prize balls on the main image display unit 70 (for example, as the total number of prize balls during the current jackpot game). Processing then proceeds to step S130.

In step S130, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the jackpot game round end notification command set in the processing of step S667 in FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S130 is YES, processing proceeds to step S131; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S132.

In step S131, the CPU 401 instructs the image and sound control unit 500, etc., to end the round effect of the jackpot game effect. Then, processing proceeds to step S132.

In step S132, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it has received the ending command for the small win game set in the processing of step S618 in FIG. 16. If the determination in step S132 is YES, processing proceeds to step S133; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S134.

In step S133, the CPU 401 instructs the ending presentation of the small win game. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image and audio control unit 500, etc., to execute the ending presentation of the small win game presentation. As already explained, in most cases, a time-limited jackpot game is executed immediately after a small win game. Therefore, for example, the presentation of the small win game and the presentation of the time-limited jackpot game may be executed as a single (integrated) jackpot game presentation, and the ending presentation of the small win game may be executed as part of the first interval presentation of the time-limited jackpot game presentation. Processing then proceeds to S134.

In step S134, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the ending command for the jackpot game set in the processing of step S670 in FIG. 18 has been received. If the determination in step S134 is YES, processing proceeds to step S135; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S136.

In step S135, the CPU 401 instructs the image/sound control unit 500 and the like to execute the ending effect of the jackpot game. The ending effect of the jackpot game is an effect that notifies the player that the jackpot game has ended, and typically involves displaying the mark of the gaming machine 1 manufacturer. Processing then proceeds to S136.

In step S136, the CPU 401 determines whether the customer waiting command and game status notification command set in the processing of step S416 in FIG. 11 have been received. If the determination in step S136 is YES, processing proceeds to step S137; if this determination is NO, the command reception processing ends and processing proceeds to step S12 in FIG. 19.

In step S137, the CPU 401 instructs the image and audio control unit 500 to start the stop state process based on the customer waiting command and game status notification command received in step S136. Then, the command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S12 of FIG. 19. Here, the stop state process is a process that is initiated when the machine enters the so-called customer waiting state. The CPU 501 of the image and audio control unit 500, which has been instructed to start the stop state process, displays a predetermined stop effect (e.g., an effect in which all decorative symbols are displayed as stopped (confirmed stop display)) corresponding to the game status on the image display unit. Note that if a predetermined time (e.g., 90 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stop effect and no other effect instruction is received from the CPU 401, the CPU 501 starts the customer waiting effect. The customer waiting effect is, for example, an effect that displays video related to the content (anime, story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 on the image display unit, or an effect that displays a portion of a predetermined effect (e.g., SP reach effect) executed during gameplay on the image display unit. However, if the CPU 501 receives information indicating that a gaming ball has passed through the gate 44 or information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the normal winning slot 43, it will continue the stopped state processing without terminating it.

[Characteristic operation of this embodiment]
Next, in the present embodiment described above using the flowchart, specific examples of notification effects (variable effects) executed by the screen (main image display unit 70, etc.) and speaker 9, etc. will be described.

[Decorative design]
Figures 22 and 23 are figures to explain the decorative pattern DI, which is displayed in a variable manner during the notification performance and then finally displayed as a fixed stop, and which is used to dramatically announce the result of the special pattern lottery using the pattern (combination of patterns) displayed as a fixed stop.

As shown in Figure 22, in this embodiment, there are nine types of decorative symbols, each depicting the numbers 1 through 9. The decorative symbols depicting 2, 4, 6, and 8 are blue, the decorative symbols depicting 1, 5, and 9 are green, and the decorative symbols depicting 3 and 7 are red. When the decorative symbols depicting 3 or 7 line up (for example, forming a double digit 777) and stop, a time-saving jackpot is indicated by the presentation; when decorative symbols other than 3 and 7 line up (for example, forming a double digit 222) and stop, a regular jackpot is indicated by the presentation. As will be described later, there are also symbols (such as consecutive symbols) other than the regular symbols depicting numbers.

FIG. 23 shows specific examples of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols include a display mode (number character mode) in which a number 701 and a character (character) 302 are surrounded by a frame 700 as shown in FIG. 23(1) and a display mode (number mode) in which only the number 701 is displayed as shown in FIG. 23(2). In the number character mode, the decorative symbols are paired with the number 1 and character A, the number 2 and character B, the number 3 and character C, the number 4 and character D, the number 5 and character E, the number 6 and character F, the number 7 and character G, the number 8 and character H, and the number 9 and character I. In FIG. 23(1), the number 3 and character C are paired in the number character mode decorative symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol in the number character mode illustrated in FIG. 23(1), the inner portion of the frame is semitransparent, allowing the background image of the notification effect, etc., to be seen through.
The decorative design of the number character type is not limited to this display mode, and for example, a decoration imitating a flower or the like may be added to the frame 700, or for example, there may be no frame 700. The decorative design of the number type is also not limited to this display mode, and for example, a decoration imitating a flower or the like may be added to the number 701.
The display mode of the decorative pattern may also be different depending on the game state. For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a number character mode in the normal game state and in a number mode in the time-saving game state, or in a number character mode in the time-saving game state and in a number mode in the normal game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the presentation mode (a notification presentation mode (which may also be called a stage) that is expressed by changing the background image, etc., in the same game state or different game states).

[Outline of the notification effect]
24 is a specific diagram for explaining the outline of the display of the decorative symbols and the reserved icon in the notification effect (variable effect). First, using FIG. 24, we will explain how the decorative symbol DI is displayed variably and then stopped (determined stop display) to notify the result of the special symbol lottery.

In this embodiment, a row of three decorative symbols DI1-DI3 is used to present the results of the special symbol lottery. The rows of three decorative symbols DI1-DI3 are arranged from bottom to top, starting with a symbol depicting the number 1 and ending with a symbol depicting the number 9. The symbols DI are displayed in a cyclical, variable fashion, with the symbol depicting the number 9 followed by a symbol depicting the number 1. The display of the decorative symbols DI, which then change to a static display (determined static display), to present the results of the special symbol lottery is referred to as a notification effect (variable effect). Notification effects may also include the display of various visual effects and the output of various audio effects. For ease of explanation, the examples shown in Figure 24 and subsequent figures only depict the pending icon RI, indicating that the first special symbol lottery is pending; the pending icon indicating that the second special symbol lottery is pending is not shown. Additionally, the following explanation will be given using the example of a case where a first special symbol lottery is held and the reserved icon RI indicates that the first special symbol is reserved, but the same applies when a second special symbol lottery is held.

First, as shown in Figure 24 (1), the main image display section 70 displays decorative symbols DI (DI1-DI3), hold icons RI (RI0-RI4), and stages ST (ST0-ST4). The decorative symbols DI are made up of three (three rows) decorative symbols DI1-DI3 and are displayed on the main image display section 70. More specifically, the left decorative symbol DI1 is displayed on the left side, the right decorative symbol DI2 is displayed on the right side, and the middle decorative symbol DI3 is displayed in the center. These left, right, and middle decorative symbols DI1-DI3 are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with (synchronized with) the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as shown in Figure 24 (2), a symbol depicting, for example, the number "2" temporarily stops as the left decorative symbol DI1. Then, as shown in Figure 24 (3), a symbol depicting, for example, the number "4" temporarily stops as the right decorative symbol DI2. Then, as shown in Figure 24 (4), a symbol depicting, for example, the number "5" temporarily stops as the center decorative symbol DI3, after which the three decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 completely stop (a confirmed stop is displayed; not shown). At this point, the variable display of the current special symbol ends (the current notification effect ends), the result of the first special symbol lottery is notified to the player, and the reserved icon RI (RI0) on stage ST0 is erased. Specifically, when the decorative pattern DI matches a specific winning pattern (typically a double number such as "777"), a jackpot result is announced for the first special pattern lottery; when the decorative pattern DI does not match a specific pattern (a losing pattern, typically a random number such as "254"), a losing result is announced for the first special pattern lottery. Then, as shown in Figure 24 (5), the decorative pattern DI begins to change in accordance with the changing display of the next special pattern. Note that in Figure 24 and subsequent figures, arrows indicate the decorative pattern DI changing from top to bottom.

Here, the hold icon RI is an image indicating the number of pending first special symbol lotteries. The main image display unit 70 also displays multiple stages ST0-ST4, where each hold icon RI is displayed. In Figures 24(1)-(4), hold icons RI (RI1-RI4) corresponding to the number of pending first special symbol lotteries are displayed above stages ST1-ST4, which are aligned horizontally in the lower area of the main image display unit 70. Also, in Figures 24(1)-(4), hold icon RI0, indicating that the hold for the first special symbol lottery has been consumed and a notification effect is being executed, is displayed above stage ST0. Thus, the hold icon on stage ST0 does not indicate a pending special symbol lottery, and therefore may be referred to as a hold consumption icon. Furthermore, because stage ST0 is a hold consumption icon stage, its display format is different from that of the other stages RI1-RI4. The hold icon (hold completion icon) on stage ST0 may be displayed in a different manner than the hold icons on the other stages RI1 to RI4.

Figure 25 is a diagram showing the color of the reserved icon and the jackpot reliability (expected jackpot probability) indicated by that color. As shown in Figure 25, a white reserved icon does not indicate a jackpot reliability, while blue, green, and red reserved icons indicate a high jackpot reliability. Among these, a blue reserved icon indicates a low jackpot reliability, a green reserved icon indicates a medium jackpot reliability, and a red reserved icon indicates a high jackpot reliability. In Figure 24 and subsequent figures, for convenience of illustration, the white color of the reserved icon is indicated with the word "white," the blue color of the reserved icon is indicated with the word "blue," the green color of the reserved icon is indicated with the word "green," and the red color of the reserved icon is indicated with the word "red."

As an example, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), stage ST1 displays a hold icon RI1 corresponding to the hold (first hold) for which the first special symbol lottery is scheduled to be held next (i.e., the oldest stored hold). Furthermore, stage ST2, located to the left of stage ST1, displays a hold icon RI2 corresponding to the hold (second hold) for which the first special symbol lottery is scheduled to be held after the first hold. Furthermore, stage ST3, located to the left of stage ST2, displays a hold icon RI3 corresponding to the hold (third hold) for which the first special symbol lottery is scheduled to be held after the second hold. Furthermore, stage ST4, located to the left of stage ST3, displays a hold icon RI4 corresponding to the hold (fourth hold) for which the first special symbol lottery is scheduled to be held after the third hold.

The hold icon RI displayed on stage ST0 disappears (is erased) immediately before the current special symbol variable display (i.e., the currently running notification effect) ends. Furthermore, the hold icons RI displayed on stages RI1-RI4 change their display positions (i.e., stage ST) sequentially each time the first special symbol lottery is executed and the notification effect (special symbol variable display) begins. Specifically, when the current special symbol variable display begins (when the notification effect begins), the hold icon RI1 displayed on stage ST1 moves from stage ST1 to stage ST0 (i.e., the first hold is consumed), and the hold icons RI2-RI4 displayed on stages ST2-ST4 move to stages ST1-ST3, respectively. In this way, the hold icon RI moves sequentially across the stage ST each time the hold for the first special symbol lottery is consumed. Note that in this embodiment, the hold icon RI is displayed above the stage ST, but the hold icon RI may also be displayed in a predetermined position (predetermined position) without the stage ST being displayed.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the lottery results for the reserved first special symbol lottery are notified from the main control unit 100 to the performance control unit 400 before the display of the changing special symbols in the first special symbol lottery begins. In other words, for example, before the first reserve icon RI1 moves from stage ST1 to stage ST0 and the changing of the special symbols in the first special symbol lottery begins (i.e., the first reserve is consumed), the lottery results for the first special symbol lottery for the first reserve are determined in advance, for example, at the time the first reserve occurs. In this embodiment, based on this preliminary determination, a pre-reading suggestion effect (such as a same-color chance eye effect) described below is executed using Figure 36, etc., so that, for example, the player can be notified in advance that there may be a reserve with a relatively high probability of winning in the first special symbol lottery, allowing them to anticipate a jackpot.

[Examples of notification effects]
26 and 27 are time charts for explaining specific examples of notification effects in this embodiment. In each of the time charts for notification effects shown in Fig. 26 and Fig. 27, the effect content written on the upper side is the effect pattern of the notification effect (in other words, the base effect that constitutes the notification effect), and the effect content written on the lower side (the effect content surrounded by a frame) is the effect content that can be added to this effect pattern. Note that all of the effect content on the upper and lower sides can be considered to be the effect pattern of the notification effect.

[Instant miss notification (variation time 2.00 seconds)]
Fig. 26(1) is a time chart of an "instant miss" notification effect with a fluctuation time of 2.00 seconds corresponding to fluctuation pattern 8 shown in Fig. 12 etc. Fig. 28 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an "instant miss" notification effect with a fluctuation time of 2.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Fig. 26(1). Below, the notification effect of an instant miss (fluctuation time 2.00 seconds) will be explained with reference to Fig. 26(1) and Fig. 28.
28 and subsequent figures, it is assumed that a notification effect is being executed in the normal game state to notify the result of the first special symbol lottery, and unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that a normal background for the normal game state (e.g., the background of City A) is displayed (moving, etc.) as the background image for the decorative symbol, and the display of the normal game background in motion is indicated by "(normal background motion)" in the upper left corner of the screen 70. Furthermore, during the execution of the notification effect and the period when the decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed, stopped symbol, normal background music for the normal game state is output from the speaker 9. Furthermore, when a notification effect is being executed in the time-saving game state, a time-saving background for the time-saving game state (e.g., the background of City B) is displayed in motion, and the probability-change background music for the time-saving game state is output.

First, from the state in which the decorative patterns are displayed as fixed and stopped in the numeric character mode before the notification effect starts (before the change starts) as shown in FIG. 28(1), at t1 in FIG. 26(1), the change begins (the notification effect starts) as shown in FIG. 28(2), and the left decorative pattern DI1, middle decorative pattern DI3, and right decorative pattern DI2 synchronize (synchronize) and perform a swinging motion for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds). The swinging motion is an action to indicate that the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (not fixed and stopped). In addition, in conjunction with this swinging motion, the left decorative pattern DI1, middle decorative pattern DI3, and right decorative pattern DI2 synchronize (synchronize) and perform a swinging emphasis effect. Note that when a normal background action is performed while waiting for customers (waiting for customers) and a notification effect is started while waiting for customers, and when a notification effect is started while waiting for customers, the normal background action performed during waiting for customers may be maintained (continued) as is to start the notification effect.

30A to 30C are diagrams for explaining an example of a swinging motion and a swing-emphasis effect. As shown in Fig. 30A to 30C, the swinging motion is a pendulum motion in which the decorative pattern number 701 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30°; see Fig. 30C) and clockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30°; see Fig. 30C) about an axis 703 (an axis that is not displayed).
30(1) to (3), the rocking emphasis effect 304 is an effect that emphasizes the rocking motion, and in conjunction with the rocking motion, repeatedly changes (periodically moves, etc.) the emphasis area (304) as if light were periodically reflected on the surface of the decorative pattern number 701. The rocking emphasis effect does not include sound effects.
In addition, when the decorative pattern character 702 or frame 700 performs a swinging motion to perform a predetermined action, the swinging emphasis effect may be an effect in which, in conjunction with this swinging motion, the emphasis area (304) is repeatedly changed (periodically moved, etc.) so that light is periodically reflected on the surface of the character 702, etc. Also, as will be described later, the swinging emphasis effect is not affected by the character action (action) of the fluctuation start emphasis effect (see FIG. 31), but may be affected by the light emitting effect of the fluctuation start emphasis effect (the visibility may be reduced by the light emitting effect).

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (3), a change start emphasis effect is executed to emphasize the start of the change (scroll) of the decorative pattern row in the order of left decorative pattern DI1, center decorative pattern DI3, and right decorative pattern DI2, and then the change (scroll) of the decorative pattern row begins.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change start highlighting effect. First, the change start highlighting effect is initiated as shown in FIG. 31 (2) from the state before the change start highlighting effect shown in FIG. 31 (1) (a state in which the swinging motion and swinging highlighting effect are being executed). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (2), the decorative pattern moves slightly in the direction opposite to the direction of change, and a character action specific to the change start highlighting effect is executed, in which the character 702 performs an action. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (3), while the character action is being executed, the light-emitting effect 305 specific to the change start highlighting effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (4), the light-emitting effect 305 expands and the decorative pattern begins to scroll. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (5), while the character action is being executed, the light-emitting effect 305 further expands to the outside of the decorative pattern, and the scrolling of the decorative pattern is accelerated. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (6), the visibility of the decorative pattern and the light-emitting effect 305 is reduced by processing such as increasing the image transparency, and the decorative pattern is scrolled at a high speed. 28(3), as a variation start emphasis effect, for example, at the timing of Fig. 31(5), a sound effect "bang" specific to the variation start emphasis effect is output at 1/10 volume from the speaker 9. In this way, the variation start emphasis effect is executed one-off (not repeatedly) to emphasize the start of the variation (scroll) of the decorative pattern row.
While Figure 31 illustrates an example in which a swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) is executed during the execution of a change start emphasis effect, the swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) may not be executed during the execution of a change start emphasis effect. Also, Figure 28 (3) illustrates an example in which the left decorative pattern DI1, the center decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 begin to change (scroll) in order, but the left decorative pattern DI1, the center decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 may begin to change (scroll) simultaneously. In this case, the swinging light-emitting effects of the left decorative pattern DI1, the center decorative pattern DI3, and the right decorative pattern DI2 are executed simultaneously (synchronized).

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (4), (the effect highlighting the start of the change ends) and the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center are displayed (scrolled) at high speed with reduced visibility.

Next, at t2 in Figure 26 (1), as shown in Figure 29 (1), a temporary stop emphasis effect is executed simultaneously to emphasize the temporary stop of the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3, and then the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are temporarily stopped simultaneously.

Figure 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop emphasis effect. First, as shown in Figure 32 (1), the visibility of the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center during scrolling improves (e.g., the transparency decreases), and the scrolling speed decreases. Then, as shown in Figure 32 (2), the temporary stop emphasis effect begins. Specifically, as shown in Figure 32 (2), the decorative symbols begin to bounce slightly in the direction of the scrolling (scrolling) and then return, and a character action specific to the temporary stop emphasis effect is executed, in which the character 702 performs an action. Note that during the bounding action, the character 702 itself may also be pulled in the direction of the scrolling of the decorative symbols and then return to its original position. Then, as shown in Figure 32 (3), the character 702 is enlarged while performing the character action, and the light-emitting effect 306 specific to the temporary stop emphasis effect is displayed. Furthermore, the number 701 is enlarged and rotates once. Then, as shown in Figure 32 (4), the character 702 and the number 701 during the character action shrink to their original size, and the light-emitting effect 306 expands. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (5), while a character action or the like is being performed, the light-emitting effect 306 expands further, reaching the outside of the decorative pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (6), the light-emitting effect 306 shrinks and the bounding action ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (7), the decorative pattern temporarily stops and a swing emphasis effect is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 29 (5), as a temporary stop emphasis effect, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (2), a sound effect "thud" specific to the temporary stop emphasis effect is output from the speaker 9 at 1/10 the volume. In this way, the temporary stop emphasis effect is executed one-off (not repeatedly) to emphasize the temporary stop of the decorative pattern row.

Note that while Figure 32 shows an example in which a shaking emphasis effect (and shaking motion) is not executed while a temporary stop emphasis effect is being executed, a shaking emphasis effect (and shaking motion) may also be executed while a temporary stop emphasis effect is being executed (for example, during the periods of Figure 32 (2) (4) to (6)). In this case, the shaking emphasis effect (and shaking motion) of the left, right, and center decorative symbols may be executed synchronously throughout. Also, while Figure 29 (5) shows an example in which the left, right, and center decorative symbols are simultaneously (synchronized) executed with a temporary stop emphasis effect and temporarily stopped at the same time, the left, right, and center decorative symbols may be executed with a temporary stop emphasis effect in sequence and temporarily stopped in sequence. In this case, when a shaking emphasis effect (and shaking motion) is executed and the shaking emphasis effect (and shaking motion) that started first and the shaking emphasis effect (and shaking motion) that started later are synchronized, the shaking emphasis effect (and shaking motion) that started later (or earlier) may be synchronized discontinuously (rather than smoothly).

Next, as shown in Figure 29 (6), the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are synchronized (harmonized) and a swinging motion is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and in conjunction with this swinging motion, the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are synchronized (harmonized) and a swinging emphasis effect is performed.

Next, at t3 in Figure 26 (1), as shown in Figure 29 (7), the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed symbols, and a loss is announced. Note that the decorative symbols that are displayed as fixed symbols are completely stopped and do not move.

As described above, according to this embodiment, even in the short-time (2.00 second) instant loss notification display that does not offer any indication of a jackpot, dramatic effects are created through the actions of the characters and the illumination of decorative patterns, preventing players from becoming bored.

[Instant Loss (variation time 12.00 seconds) notification effect]
Figure 26 (2) is a time chart of an "instant loss" notification effect with a fluctuation time of 12.00 seconds corresponding to fluctuation pattern 7 shown in Figure 12 etc. Figures 33 to 35 are diagrams for explaining a specific example of an "instant loss" notification effect with a fluctuation time of 12.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Figure 26 (2).

Here, as shown in Figure 26 (2), in the notification effect for an "instant miss" with a variable time of 12.00 seconds, any one of the four effects - the reach prompting effect, the pseudo consecutive prompting effect, the same-color chance eye effect, and the hold change effect - can be executed. Therefore, with reference to Figures 33 and 34, we will explain the cases when the reach prompting effect is executed, the pseudo consecutive prompting effect is executed, and when none of the four effects are executed. Note that the notification effect may be configured so that two or more of the above four effects can be executed.

First, from the state before the notification effect (before the change begins) shown in Figure 33 (1), at t1 in Figure 26 (2), the decorative pattern row begins to change as shown in Figure 33 (2). Next, as shown in Figure 33 (3), a change start highlight effect is executed in order from the left decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern row begins to change (scroll). Next, as shown in Figure 33 (4), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center are displayed (scrolled) in a changing manner. The contents of Figures 33 (1) to (4) are the same as the contents of Figures 28 (1) to (4).

Next, at t2 in Figure 31 (2), as shown in Figure 33 (5), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see Figure 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern DI1, and the left decorative pattern DI1 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 33 (6), a swinging motion is performed on the left decorative pattern DI1, and in conjunction with this swinging motion, a swing emphasis effect is performed on the left decorative pattern DI1.

Next, when a reach-promoting effect is executed, at t3 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 33 (7), the right decorative pattern DI2 slows down, creating a reach-promoting effect that encourages (creates anticipation of) a provisional stop at a pattern that will result in a reach, and a reach-promoting effect (see Figure 57, etc.) is executed. The swinging emphasis effect of the left decorative pattern DI1 also continues.

Next, at t4 in Fig. 26(2), as shown in Fig. 33(8), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see Fig. 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the right decorative symbol DI2 that has not been achieved, and the right decorative symbol DI2 is temporarily stopped. Also, the swing emphasis effect of the left decorative symbol DI1 continues.
31(7) is executed, the temporary stop highlighting effect of the right decorative symbol DI2 may not be executed. By doing so, the feeling of the flow of the symbols that will result in a reach can be effectively expressed (afterglow).

If the reach-inducing effect is not executed, the effect shown in Figure 33 (8) will be displayed after Figure 33 (6).

Next, as shown in Figure 33 (9), a swinging motion is executed synchronously (in unison) for the left and right decorative patterns, and in conjunction with this swinging motion, a swinging emphasis effect is executed synchronously (in unison) for the left and right decorative patterns. Note that in this case, when the swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) of the left decorative pattern DI1, which started first, and the swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) of the right decorative pattern DI2, which started later, are synchronized, the swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) of the decorative pattern which started later (or earlier) may be synchronized discontinuously (rather than smoothly).

(If the pseudo consecutive promotion effect is not executed) Next, at t6 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 34 (4), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see Figure 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern DI3, and this middle decorative pattern DI3 is temporarily stopped. In addition, the synchronized rocking emphasis effect (and rocking motion) of the left and right decorative patterns continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 34 (5), the left, right, and center decorative patterns synchronize (harmonize) and perform a swinging motion for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and in conjunction with this swinging motion, the left, right, and center decorative patterns synchronize (harmonize) and perform a swinging emphasis effect. Note that in this case, when the swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) of the left and right decorative patterns that started first and the swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) of the center decorative pattern that started later are synchronized, the swinging emphasis effect (and swinging motion) of the decorative pattern that started later (or earlier) may synchronize discontinuously (rather than smoothly).

Next, at t7 in Figure 26 (2), the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, as shown in Figure 34 (6), and a loss is announced.

On the other hand, when a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, the effect shifts from Figure 33 (6) to Figure 34 (1). In this case, at t4 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 34 (1), similar to Figure 33 (8), a temporary stop emphasis effect (see Figure 32) is executed to emphasize the temporary stop of the right decorative pattern DI2, which does not achieve a reach, and this right decorative pattern DI2 is temporarily stopped. In addition, the swing emphasis effect for the left decorative pattern DI1 continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 34 (2), similar to Figure 33 (9), the left and right decorative patterns are synchronized (harmonized) and a swinging motion and swing emphasis effect are executed.

Next, at t5 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 34 (3), a pseudo-continuous hype effect (see Figure 57, etc.) is executed, in which the character "continuous" is drawn as the middle decorative pattern DI3 (a special decorative pattern that is different from normal decorative patterns and that can signal the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect by temporarily stopping) slows down to encourage a temporary stop (i.e., to raise expectations that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed).

As already explained, thereafter, at t6 in Figure 26(2), the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops as shown in Figure 34(4), and then the left, right, and middle decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 synchronize (synchronize) as shown in Figure 34(5), and at t7 in Figure 26(2), the left, right, and middle decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are displayed as fixed stops as shown in Figure 34(6), and a miss is announced.
In addition, when the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, the temporary stop emphasizing effect of the middle decorative pattern DI3 may not be executed. By doing so, the feeling of the consecutive patterns flowing (afterglow) can be effectively expressed.
In addition, the above has described a mode in which the left, right, and center decorative patterns temporarily stop simultaneously in the notification effect of an immediate loss (FIG. 29(5)), and a mode in which the decorative patterns temporarily stop in a fixed order of left, right, and center (FIGS. 33(5)(8), 34(4), etc.). However, the order in which the decorative patterns temporarily stop is not limited to this, and for example, the order in which the decorative patterns temporarily stop may be different each time, or they may temporarily stop in a random order each time, or the left and right decorative patterns may temporarily stop simultaneously.

Next, with reference to Figures 35 to 37, we will explain the cases when a same-color chance eye effect is executed and when a reserve change effect is executed in the notification effect for a "regular miss" with a fluctuation time of 12.00 seconds (see Figure 26 (2)).

First, from the state before the notification effect (before the change begins) shown in Figure 35 (1), at t1 in Figure 26 (2), the decorative pattern row begins to change as shown in Figure 35 (2). Next, as shown in Figure 35 (3), a change start highlight effect is executed in order from the left decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern row begins to change (scroll). Next, as shown in Figure 35 (4), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center are displayed (scrolled) in a changing manner. The contents of Figures 35 (1) to (4) are the same as the contents of Figures 28 (1) to (4).

Next, at t2 in Figure 26 (2), the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in Figure 35 (5), and then a swinging emphasis effect is produced for the left decorative symbol as shown in Figure 35 (6). Then, at t4 in Figure 26 (2), the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at a symbol that does not result in a reach as shown in Figure 35 (7), and then the left and right decorative symbols are synchronized (harmonized) to produce a swinging emphasis effect as shown in Figure 35 (8). The contents of Figures 35 (5) to (8) are the same as the contents of Figures 33 (5), (6), (8), and (9).

Next, at t6 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 35 (9), the center decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that results in a blue chance symbol, and a blue chance symbol highlight effect is performed for the left, right, and center decorative symbols DI1 to DI3. Furthermore, during the chance symbol highlight effect, swinging motions and swinging emphasis effects are performed synchronously (synchronized) for the left, right, and center decorative symbols. The chance symbol highlight effect is an effect that suggests (or emphasizes) a relatively high probability of a jackpot in the subsequent notification effect (subsequent fluctuation) by highlighting the same-color chance symbol, and includes character movements, lighting effects, sound effects, and the like unique to chance symbol highlight effects. Furthermore, because the chance symbol highlight effect is performed when all the left, right, and center decorative symbols temporarily stop, it can be considered a type of temporary stop highlight effect and can also be considered an emphasis effect on a larger scale than the regular temporary stop highlight effect (Figure 32). Here, for a blue chance symbol to be achieved, all the left, right, and center decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 must temporarily stop on blue symbols (see Figure 22). In addition, when the middle decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops in FIG. 35 (9), a similar effect to that in FIG. 34 (4) (a temporary stop highlight effect for the middle decorative symbol DI3) may be executed first, followed by the blue chance symbol highlight effect as described above. Furthermore, when the left, right, and center decorative symbols temporarily stop simultaneously, a temporary stop highlight effect may be executed for both the left, right, and center decorative symbols simultaneously, followed by the blue chance symbol highlight effect as described above. Alternatively, the middle decorative symbol DI3 may be slowed down to produce a same-color chance symbol hype effect (and a same-color chance symbol hype highlight effect that emphasizes this effect) that encourages a temporary stop on a symbol that results in a same-color chance symbol (a blue chance symbol in FIG. 35 ). Furthermore, if a same-color chance symbol is not achieved after the same-color chance symbol hype effect is executed, the temporary stop highlight effect for the middle decorative symbol DI3 may not be executed. This effectively conveys the feeling (afterglow) of a same-color chance symbol flowing.

Next, at t7 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 35 (10), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops after the blue chance eye highlighting effect ends and the character returns to its basic position, and a loss is announced.

Figure 36 is a specific diagram for explaining the types of same-color chance eye effects and chance eye emphasis effects. Same-color chance eye effects include a blue chance eye effect (Figure 36(1)) in which the left, right, and center decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 temporarily stop on a blue symbol (see Figure 27); a green chance eye effect (Figure 36(2)) in which they temporarily stop on a green symbol; and a red chance eye effect (Figure 36(3)) in which they temporarily stop on a red symbol (see Figure 22). In addition, there are blue chance eye emphasis effects that include unique character actions, blue light-emitting effects, and the sound effect "Geen" (volume 6/10) to emphasize the blue chance eye effect; a green chance eye emphasis effect that includes unique character actions, green light-emitting effects, and the sound effect "GigiGeen" (volume 8/10) to emphasize the green chance eye effect; and a red chance eye emphasis effect that includes unique character actions, red light-emitting effects, and the sound effect "GigiGeen" (volume 7/10) to emphasize the red chance eye effect. Furthermore, a green chance eye effect has a higher reliability of a jackpot in a later notification effect than a blue chance eye effect, and a red chance eye effect has a higher reliability of a jackpot in a later notification effect than a green chance eye effect. Furthermore, when same-color chance eye effects are executed across multiple notification effects, multiple same-color chance eye effects are executed so that the reliability of a jackpot does not decrease.

On the other hand, when a hold change effect is executed, the effect shifts from Figure 35 (8) to Figure 37 (1). In this case, at t6 in Figure 26 (2), as shown in Figure 37 (1), a special decorative pattern (different from normal decorative patterns, a special decorative pattern that, when temporarily stopped, indicates that the hold icon will change to a state suggesting a high probability of a jackpot) with the character "Hen" drawn as the middle decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops, and a hold change emphasis effect is executed. The hold change emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the hold icon when a hold change effect is executed in which the hold icon that is the target of a pre-reading suggestion changes to a state suggesting a high probability of a jackpot, and includes unique actions, lighting effects, and sound effects. In Figure 37 (1), when the reserve icon RI2, which is the target of the pre-reading suggestion, changes from white to green, indicating a high probability of a jackpot, a unique action occurs, such as lightning flashing towards the reserve icon RI2, a unique lighting effect is displayed on the reserve icon RI2, and a unique sound effect of "battery bang" (volume 7/10) is output.

Here, the hold change effects include a blue hold change effect (not shown) in which the hold icon changes to blue, a green hold change effect (Figure 38 (1)) in which the hold icon changes to green, and a red hold change effect (not shown) in which the hold icon changes to red. Also included are blue hold change emphasis effects that include unique actions, lighting effects, and the sound effect "bari" (volume 6/10) to emphasize the blue hold change effect, green hold change emphasis effects that include unique actions, lighting effects, and the sound effect "bari-bari" (volume 7/10) to emphasize the green hold change effect, and red hold change emphasis effects that include unique actions, lighting effects, and the sound effect "bari-bari-bari" (volume 8/10) to emphasize the red hold change effect (see Figure 59, etc.). Furthermore, green hold change effects have a higher jackpot reliability than blue hold change effects, and red hold change effects have a higher jackpot reliability than green hold change effects. Furthermore, when hold change effects are executed across multiple notification effects, multiple hold change effects are executed to prevent a decrease in jackpot reliability.

Next, as shown in Figure 37 (2), after the variable pattern is switched to the normal decorative pattern, the left, right, and center decorative patterns are synchronized (synchronized) with each other and a swinging motion and swing emphasis effect are performed, similar to Figure 34 (5) etc.

Next, as shown in Figure 37 (3), at t7 in Figure 26 (2), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that had been temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, and a miss is announced. Note that in Figure 37 (1), a hold change prompting effect (and a hold change prompting emphasis effect that emphasizes this effect) may be performed by slowing down the variable symbol to indicate that the variable symbol has temporarily stopped. Furthermore, if the variable symbol does not temporarily stop after the hold change prompting effect is performed, a hold change prompting effect that emphasizes the temporary stop of the normal decorative symbol that switches from the variable symbol may not be performed. By doing this, the feeling that the hold change effect has flowed (the lingering impression) can be effectively expressed.

[Notification of Reach Miss/Reach Hit (variable time 15.00 seconds)]
Figure 26 (3) is a time chart of the notification effect of "reach miss"/"reach hit" with a fluctuation time of 15.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number 5/6 shown in Figure 12 etc. Figures 38 to 47 are diagrams for explaining specific examples of the notification effect of "reach miss"/"reach hit" with a fluctuation time of 15.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Figure 26 (3).

First, from the state before the notification effect (before the change begins) shown in Figure 38 (1), at t1 in Figure 26 (3), the decorative pattern row begins to change as shown in Figure 38 (2). Next, as shown in Figure 38 (3), a change start highlighting effect is executed in order from the left decorative pattern, and then the decorative pattern row begins to change (scroll). Next, as shown in Figure 38 (4), the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center are displayed (scrolled) in a changing manner. The contents of Figures 38 (1) to (4) are the same as the contents of Figures 28 (1) to (4).

Next, as shown in Figure 38 (5), when a cut-in preview effect is executed, at t2 in Figure 26 (3) (e.g., 2 seconds after the start of the notification effect), a blue cut-in preview effect and a blue cut-in preview emphasis effect are executed, in which a blue cut-in image 309 with the words "Is it hot?" is displayed. The cut-in preview emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the cut-in preview effect, and includes unique lighting effects and sound effects. It may also include unique actions (e.g., actions of the cut-in image, etc.).

Here, the cut-in preview effects include a blue cut-in preview effect in which a blue cut-in image with the words "Hot?" is displayed (see Figure 38 (5)), a green cut-in preview effect in which a green cut-in image with the words "Hot!!" is displayed (see Figure 49 (5)), and a red cut-in preview effect in which a red cut-in image with the words "Super Hot!!" is displayed (see Figure 52 (2)). Furthermore, the blue cut-in preview emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the blue cut-in preview effect and includes a unique lighting effect and sound effect "Zuban" (volume 5/10), the green cut-in preview emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the green cut-in preview effect and includes a unique lighting effect and sound effect "Zubaban" (volume 6/10), and the red cut-in preview emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the red cut-in preview effect and includes a unique lighting effect and sound effect "Zubaban" (volume 7/10) (see Figure 59, etc.). Additionally, the reliability of a jackpot during an ongoing notification effect is higher for a green cut-in notification effect than for a blue cut-in notification effect, and higher for a red cut-in notification effect than for a green cut-in notification effect.

After Figure 38(4) or (5), (if a pseudo-consecutive effect is executed) at t3 in Figure 26(3), the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in Figure 38(6), and then a swing-enhancing effect for the left decorative symbol is performed as shown in Figure 38(7). Then, at t4 in Figure 26(3), the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at a symbol that does not result in a reach as shown in Figure 38(8), and then the left and right decorative symbols are synchronized (harmonized) to perform a swing-enhancing effect as shown in Figure 39(1). The contents of Figures 38(6)-(8) and Figure 39(1) are the same as the contents of Figures 33(5), (6), (8), and (9).

Next, at t5 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 39 (2), a pseudo consecutive promotion effect is executed in the same way as in Figure 34 (3).

Next, as shown in Figure 39 (3), the consecutive symbols temporarily stop as the middle decorative symbol DI3, and a pseudo consecutive symbol highlight effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive symbol highlight effect is an effect that emphasizes the temporary stop of the consecutive symbols, suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive symbol, and includes a unique movement, lighting effects, and a "clack" sound effect (volume 7/10).

Figures 41 and 42 are diagrams illustrating examples of pseudo-continuous highlighting effects. For example, as shown in Figures 41 (1) to (3), when consecutive symbols temporarily stop, in the pseudo-continuous highlighting effect, a X-shaped light-emitting effect 309 (a unique light-emitting effect) is displayed, spreading out from the center of the consecutive symbols until it can no longer be seen on the screen. Also, as shown in Figures 42 (1) to (3), when consecutive symbols temporarily stop, in the pseudo-continuous highlighting effect, the consecutive symbols are enlarged until they can no longer be seen on the screen, and the light-emitting effect 309 spreads out from the center of the consecutive symbols until it can no longer be seen on the screen.

Next, at t6 in Figure 26 (3), the left, right, and center decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that had been temporarily stopped are re-fluctuated as shown in Figure 39 (4), thereby executing (completing) the pseudo consecutive effect. Note that, because this re-fluctuation is a pseudo re-fluctuation, the fluctuation start emphasis effect (see Figure 31) is not executed when the re-fluctuation occurs. Also, the pseudo consecutive effect of Figure 39 (2) may not be executed. Furthermore, the effect of temporarily stopping the consecutive symbols of Figure 39 (2) and the effect of re-fluctuating the temporarily stopped decorative symbols of Figure 39 (4) can be considered a pseudo consecutive effect together.

Here, the pseudo consecutive effect sets described using Figures 38 (6) to (8) and Figures 39 (1) to (4) can be executed up to three times in one notification effect (one variation), and the more they are executed, the higher the reliability of a jackpot in the currently executing notification effect. Therefore, if one or two more pseudo consecutive effect sets are executed, a pseudo consecutive effect set is executed as shown in Figure 39 (5). Note that at least some of the pseudo consecutive effect highlighting effects may be different in each pseudo consecutive effect set.

Next, at t7 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 39 (6), the same effect as in Figure 33 (5) is executed and the left decorative symbol DI1 temporarily stops. If no pseudo consecutive effect is executed here, the effect will move from Figure 38 (4) or (5) to Figure 39 (6).

Next, if a reach prompting effect is to be executed, at t8 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 39 (8), the reach prompting effect is executed in the same manner as in Figure 33 (7).

Following Figure 39 (7) or (8), at t9 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 40 (1), the right decorative symbol DI2 temporarily stops at a symbol that indicates a reach is achieved (i.e., a reach is achieved), and a reach achievement highlighting effect is executed. The reach achievement highlighting effect is an effect that emphasizes the reach achievement (reach eye), and includes unique character movements, lighting effects, and the sound effect "Zugyuun" (volume 7/10) (see Figure 59, etc.). In addition, the decorative symbols (reach eyes) on the left and right that have achieved a reach are synchronized (harmonized) to create a swinging highlighting effect.

Figure 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reach-established highlighting effect. For example, as shown in Figure 43 (1), in a reach-established highlighting effect, a unique character action is performed on the left and right decorative symbols (reach eyes) that have reached a reach, and a unique line-shaped light-emitting effect 310 is displayed that simultaneously spans (connects) the reach eyes. Also, for example, as shown in Figure 43 (2), in a reach-established highlighting effect, a unique character action is performed on the reach eyes, and a unique light-emitting effect 310 is displayed that simultaneously spans and covers the reach eyes. Also, for example, as shown in Figure 43 (3), in a reach-established highlighting effect, a unique character action is performed on the reach eyes, and a unique band-shaped light-emitting effect 310 is displayed in which the words "Reach!!" move from left to right, simultaneously spanning the reach eyes. Note that when the right decorative symbol DI2 temporarily stops on a symbol that results in a reach (as in Figure 33 (8), etc.), a temporary stop highlighting effect may be executed first, and then a reach-established highlighting effect may be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 40 (2), the decorative symbols (reach marks) on the left and right are enlarged and then separated to the left and right while a synchronized (synchronized) swing emphasis effect is performed. Note that the reach marks may be enlarged until they are no longer visible on the screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 40 (3), the central decorative pattern is enlarged to a jackpot pattern (a pattern that results in a double digit), and the speed is slowed down to create a jackpot stop teaser effect (and a jackpot stop teaser emphasis effect that emphasizes this effect; see Figure 61, etc.) that creates excitement (and creates anticipation) that the pattern will temporarily stop.

Next, in the case of a miss, at t10 in FIG. 26 (3), as shown in FIG. 40 (4), a presentation similar to that in FIG. 35 (4) is executed, in which the central decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that results in a miss, and a temporary stop emphasis presentation is executed. Note that this temporary stop emphasis presentation (a temporary stop emphasis presentation for a reach miss) may be different from the normal temporary stop emphasis presentation (see FIG. 32, etc.). Specifically, it may be a unique presentation using character movements or lighting effects, or it may be a smaller-scale presentation (compared to the normal temporary stop emphasis presentation). Furthermore, the temporary stop emphasis presentation may not be executed. This leaves the player with a sense of anticipation, as if a revival win presentation (not shown) would be executed, in which the central decorative symbol DI3 would re-fluctuate and then temporarily stop on a symbol that results in a jackpot, resulting in a jackpot. In this case, it is desirable to configure this revival win presentation to be executed with a low probability (e.g., 1% of the time a jackpot occurs). This temporary stop emphasis effect (a temporary stop emphasis effect for a missed reach) can also be thought of as a missed reach emphasis effect that emphasizes a missed reach (see Figure 59, etc.).

Next, as shown in Figure 40 (5), the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size, and a synchronized (synchronized) swing emphasis effect is executed.

Next, at t11 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 40 (6), the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center are displayed as fixed stops with a reach miss, and a miss is announced.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at t10 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 40 (7), the center decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on the symbol that results in a jackpot (double numbers), and a double numbers highlighting effect is executed. The double numbers highlighting effect is an effect that emphasizes the jackpot symbol (double numbers), and includes unique character movements, lighting effects, and a "thud" sound effect (volume 8/10). In addition, a swinging highlighting effect is executed in synchronization (synchronization) with the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center that have temporarily stopped.

Figures 44 and 45 are diagrams each illustrating an example of a doublet highlighting effect. For example, as shown in Figures 44 (1) to (3), in a doublet highlighting effect, a unique character action is performed on the left, right, and center decorative symbols (doublets), and a cross-shaped light-emitting effect 311 (unique light-emitting effect) is displayed, spreading out from the center of the center decorative symbol until it can be seen off the screen. Also, as shown in Figures 45 (1) to (3), in a doublet highlighting effect, a unique character action is performed on the left, right, and center decorative symbols (doublets), and a number of cross-shaped light-emitting effects 311 (unique light-emitting effects) are displayed, spreading out from multiple positions on the left, right, and center decorative symbols until they can be seen off the screen.

Next, as shown in Figure 40 (8), in the temporary stop state, a pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect is executed, indicating that the left, right, and center decorative patterns are confirmed. The pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect is an effect that emphasizes the jackpot pattern (double numbers), and includes a unique light-emitting effect and a sound effect "kin" (volume 2/10). In addition, a shaking highlight effect is executed (continued) in synchronization (synchronization) with the left, right, and center decorative patterns that have temporarily stopped. In addition, the pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect may include a unique action effect (character action, etc.). In addition, the shaking highlight effect may end before the pattern confirmation suggestion highlight effect is executed.

Figures 46 and 47 are diagrams showing examples of a confirmed symbol highlight effect. As shown in (1) → (2) → (3) of Figure 42, the confirmed symbol highlight effect is an highlight effect in which the light-emitting effect 312, which appears to be reflective and glowing, moves, for example, from bottom to top. By executing the confirmed symbol highlight effect in this manner, the decorative symbol, which is oscillating in a provisionally stopped state, can appear to have been confirmed and completely stopped, despite being oscillating. Here, the confirmed symbol highlight effect is an important effect that suggests that the decorative symbol will definitely stop at a symbol indicating a jackpot (double numbers). Because it suggests that a jackpot has finally been confirmed after various effects that encourage anticipation of a jackpot have ended, it is intentionally a small-scale (low-key) effect. Therefore, the confirmed symbol highlight effect is not executed simultaneously with various highlight effects that encourage anticipation of a jackpot (cut-in highlight effect, pseudo-consecutive highlight effect, reach completion highlight effect, SP development highlight effect, etc.). Also, for example, as shown in (1), (2), and (3) of Figure 47, the confirmed symbol suggestion highlight effect is a very large-scale highlight effect in which the light-emitting effect 312 spreads from the center decorative symbol DI3 until it finally covers the entire screen for an instant (for example, until the left, right, and center decorative symbols become difficult to distinguish or impossible to distinguish).

Next, at t11 in Figure 26 (3), as shown in Figure 40 (9), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, and a jackpot is announced.

[SP Miss/SP Win (Variable Time 60.00 Seconds) Notification]
Figure 27(1) is a time chart of the notification effect of "SP Miss"/"SP Hit" with a fluctuation time of 60.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number 3/4 shown in Figure 12 etc. Figures 48 to 51 are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the notification effect of "SP Miss"/"SP Hit" with a fluctuation time of 60.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Figure 27(1).

First, from t1 to t6 (to be precise, up to t7) in Figure 27 (1), as shown in Figure 48 (1), similar to the effects in Figures 38 (1) to 39 (5), it is possible to execute a cut-in preview effect and up to three sets of pseudo consecutive effects after the fluctuation begins.

Next, when a specific result prediction effect is executed, as shown in Figures 48 (2) to (5), an effect similar to Figures 33 (5), (6), (8), and (9) is executed, with the left decorative pattern DI1 temporarily stopping, and then the right decorative pattern DI2 temporarily stopping with a pattern that does not result in a reach, and the left and right decorative patterns are synchronized (harmonized) to execute a swing emphasis effect.

Then, at t7 in FIG. 27(1), as shown in FIG. 48(6), the center decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops with the same blue color as the left and right decorative symbols, resulting in a blue specific result for the center, left, right, and right decorative symbols DI1-DI3 (see FIG. 22), and a blue specific result highlighting effect is executed. The specific result highlighting effect is an effect that emphasizes the occurrence of a specific result and indicates the likelihood of a zone effect (expectation of zone entry) being executed in the ongoing notification effect, and includes a unique character action, a light-emitting effect (blue light), and the sound effect "Queen" (volume 6/10). Note that when the center decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops, an effect similar to that shown in FIG. 34(4) (a temporary stop highlighting effect for the center decorative symbol DI3) may be executed, followed by the blue specific result highlighting effect described above. Furthermore, the specific result highlighting effect can also be considered an effect that emphasizes the temporary stop of a decorative symbol, and therefore may be considered a type of temporary stop highlighting effect on a larger scale than a regular temporary stop highlighting effect.

Here, the specific result highlighting effects include a blue specific result highlighting effect (Figure 48 (6)) that occurs when the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 all temporarily stop on blue patterns (see Figure 22), a green specific result highlighting effect (not shown) that occurs when the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 all temporarily stop on green patterns, and a red specific result highlighting effect (not shown) that occurs when the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 all temporarily stop on red patterns. The blue specific result highlighting effect includes a unique character action, a light-emitting effect (blue light), and the sound effect "Queen" (volume 6/10). The green specific result highlighting effect includes a unique character action, a light-emitting effect (green light), and the sound effect "Queen" (volume 7/10). The red specific result highlighting effect includes a unique character action, a light-emitting effect (green light), and the sound effect "Queen" (volume 8/10). Furthermore, the likelihood of entering the zone is higher with a green specific result emphasis effect than with a blue specific result emphasis effect, and higher with a red specific result emphasis effect than with a green specific result emphasis effect. Furthermore, if a specific result emphasis effect is executed multiple times in a single notification effect, multiple specific result emphasis effects are executed so that the likelihood of entering the zone does not decrease.

Next, as shown in Figure 48 (7), the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center that were temporarily stopped in the specific result highlighting effect are changed again. Note that because this change is a pseudo change, it is preferable that the change start highlighting effect is not executed when the change is changed again, but it may be executed.

Next, if one or two more sets of the specific result highlighting effects (specific result announcement) described using Figures 48 (2) to (7) are to be executed, a set of specific result highlighting effects is executed as shown in Figure 48 (8).

Next, if a zone effect is not executed, from t9 to t11 in Figure 27(1), as shown in Figures 49(1) to (4), effects similar to those in Figures 39(6) to (8) and Figure 40(1) are executed, in which the left decorative symbol DI1 temporarily stops, a reach-inducing effect is executed, and then the right decorative symbol DI2 temporarily stops, resulting in an effect in which a reach is achieved. Note that if a specific result highlighting effect is not executed, the effect will move from Figure 48(1) to Figure 49(1).

Next, when a cut-in preview is to be performed, as shown in Figure 49 (5), at t12 in Figure 27 (1), a cut-in preview is performed in the same way as in Figure 38 (5). Note that in Figure 49 (5), a green cut-in preview is performed.

On the other hand, when a zone effect is executed, at t8 in Figure 27 (1), as shown in Figure 50 (1), the zone effect begins, and a zone entry emphasis effect is executed. The zone effect is an effect that suggests a high probability of a jackpot in the currently executing notification effect, and is an effect that displays a band image that displays a zone background for the zone effect and a moving text image that reads "Weak Zone" or "Strong Zone." Furthermore, a zone effect that displays a band image of the "Strong Zone" has a higher probability of a jackpot than a zone effect that displays a band image of the "Weak Zone." In Figure 50 (1), a zone effect that displays a band image of the "Weak Zone" is executed. Furthermore, an SP reach effect begins upon the end of the zone effect. Furthermore, the zone entry emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the zone effect, and includes a unique lighting effect (e.g., lighting of the zone background) and a "whining" sound effect (volume 7/10). It may also include unique actions (e.g., the action of the band image). Furthermore, the zone entry emphasis effect may be different for weak and strong zones. Additionally, when the zone effect ends, another effect (such as an SPSP reach effect) that increases the expectation of a jackpot may begin.

Next, from t9 to t12 in Figure 27 (1), as shown in Figures 50 (1) to (5), while the zone effect is being executed, an effect similar to that in Figures 49 (1) to (5) is executed, and after the left decorative pattern DI1 temporarily stops, if a reach-prompting effect is executed, the reach-prompting effect is executed, and then if a reach is achieved and a cut-in preview effect is executed, the cut-in preview effect is executed. Note that in Figure 50 (5), a green cut-in preview effect is executed.

After Figure 49 (4) (5) or Figure 50 (4) (5), at t13 in Figure 27 (1), the SP Reach effect develops as shown in Figure 51 (1). Specifically, an SP Reach background dedicated to the SP Reach effect (for example, a background during an SP battle in which the protagonist character fights an enemy character) is displayed, and an SP development emphasis effect is executed to emphasize that the SP Reach effect has developed. The SP development emphasis effect displays a unique lighting effect that causes the entire SP Reach background to glow on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen glows), and outputs a unique sound effect "Gyuun" (volume 8/10) (see Figure 63, etc.). At this time, the decorative pattern changes from a numeric character form to a numeric form (see Figure 23) and is displayed in a reduced size at a distance at the top of the screen, and a swing emphasis effect is executed (continued) in synchronization with the numeric form decorative pattern (reach eye).

Next, in the case of a loss, at t14 in Figure 27 (1), as shown in Figure 51 (2), an image of the SP battle defeat is displayed on the SP Reach background, and an SP defeat emphasis effect is executed on the SP Reach background, etc. The SP defeat emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SP Reach is a loss (loss of the SP battle), for example, by displaying a unique lighting effect that causes a small portion of the SP Reach background to light up (e.g., the central area of the display screen to light up), and outputting a unique sound effect "Zoon" (volume 7/10) (see Figure 63, etc.). This unique sound effect also doubles as the sound effect for the temporary stop emphasis effect of the intermediate decorative pattern DI3, which temporarily stops on a losing symbol. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 51 (2), in this temporary stop emphasis effect, a small, unique lighting effect is displayed on the intermediate decorative pattern DI3. Note that no swing emphasis effect is executed on the temporarily stopped intermediate decorative pattern DI3. Here, when the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that will result in a loss, the lighting effect for the temporary stop highlighting effect for the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 is not displayed, leaving the player with a sense of anticipation that the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 will change again and then temporarily stop on a symbol that will result in a jackpot, resulting in a revival win effect (not shown). For this reason, it is desirable to configure this revival win effect to be executable with a low probability (for example, 1% of the time a jackpot occurs).

Next, as shown in Figure 51 (3), the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is returned from the number form to the number character form (see Figure 23) and enlarged, and a swinging emphasis effect is executed in synchronization (synchronization) with the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center.

Next, at t15 in Figure 27(1), as shown in Figure 51(4), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, indicating a loss.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at t14 in Figure 27 (1), as shown in Figure 50 (5), an image of the SP battle victory is displayed in the SP reach background, and an SP victory emphasis effect is executed on the SP reach background, etc. The SP victory emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SP reach is a jackpot (SP battle victory), and is, for example, an effect that displays a unique lighting effect that causes the entire SP reach background to light up on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen to light up), and outputs a unique sound effect "Ta-da!" (sound 9/10) (see Figure 63, etc.).

Furthermore, at t14 in FIG. 27 (1), as shown in FIG. 50 (5), the central decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that results in a jackpot, and a special temporary stop emphasis effect is executed on the central decorative symbol DI3. This special temporary stop emphasis effect (temporary stop emphasis effect when a doublet occurs) executes an effect different from the normal temporary stop emphasis effect (FIG. 32), and for example, a special light-emitting effect is displayed. Furthermore, no oscillation emphasis effect is executed on the temporarily stopped central decorative symbol DI3. Note that when the central decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that results in a jackpot, the temporary stop emphasis effect may not be executed, and the above-mentioned special sound effect "Ta-da!" may not be output. Furthermore, a oscillation emphasis effect may be executed on the temporarily stopped central decorative symbol DI3.

Next, as shown in Figure 51 (6), the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is returned from the number form to the number character form (see Figure 23) and enlarged, and a performance emphasizing the formation of a doublet is executed (see Figures 44, 45, 61, etc.).

Next, as shown in Figure 51 (7), similar to Figure 40 (8), a pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect is executed for the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center (see Figures 46, 47, 61, etc.).

Next, at t15 in Figure 27 (1), as shown in Figure 51 (8), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, indicating a jackpot.

[Notification of SPSP miss/SPSP win (variation time 90.00 seconds)]
Figure 27 (2) is a time chart of the notification effect of "SPSP Miss" / "SPSP Hit" with a fluctuation time of 90.00 seconds corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1/2 shown in Figure 12 etc. Figure 52 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the notification effect of "SPSP Miss" / "SPSP Hit" with a fluctuation time of 90.00 seconds executed in the time chart of Figure 27 (2).

First, from t1 to t13 in Figure 27 (2), as shown in Figure 52 (1), the effects from the start of fluctuation to the SP reach effect are executed, similar to t1 to t13 in Figure 27 (1) (Figures 48 (1) to 51 (1)).

Next, when a cut-in preview effect is executed, at t14 in Figure 27 (2), as shown in Figure 52 (2), a cut-in preview effect, etc. is executed in the same manner as in Figure 38 (5) while an SP reach effect is executed, as shown in Figure 52 (2). In Figure 52 (2), a red cut-in preview effect, etc. is executed.

After Figure 52 (1) or (2), at t15 in Figure 27 (2), the SPSP reach effect develops as shown in Figure 48 (3). Specifically, an SPSP reach background dedicated to the SPSP reach effect (for example, a background during an SPSP battle in which the protagonist character fights an enemy boss character) is displayed, and an SPSP development emphasis effect is executed to emphasize that the SPSP reach effect has developed. The SPSP development emphasis effect displays a unique lighting effect that causes the entire SPSP reach background to emit light on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen emits light), and outputs a unique sound effect "Gyoon" (volume 9/10) (see Figure 63, etc.). In addition, a synchronized shaking emphasis effect is executed (continues) for the decorative symbol (reach eye) in the form of a number displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen. Note that the SP reach effect and/or the SPSP reach effect may be configured not to display decorative symbols.

Next, in the case of a loss, at time t16 in Figure 27 (2), as shown in Figure 52 (2), an image of the SPSP battle defeat is displayed on the SPSP reach background, and an SPSP defeat emphasis effect is executed on the SPSP reach background, etc. The SPSP defeat emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SPSP reach is a loss (a loss in the SPSP battle). For example, it displays a unique lighting effect that partially illuminates the SPSP reach background (e.g., the central area of the display screen) and outputs a unique sound effect "Zuzoon" (volume 7/10) (see Figure 63, etc.). This unique sound effect also doubles as the sound effect for the temporary stop emphasis effect for the intermediate decorative pattern DI3, which temporarily stops on a losing symbol. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 52 (4), in this temporary stop emphasis effect, a unique small lighting effect is displayed on the intermediate decorative pattern DI3. Note that a swing emphasis effect is not executed on the temporarily stopped intermediate decorative pattern DI3, but it may be executed. Here, when the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that will result in a loss, the lighting effect for the temporary stop highlighting effect for the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 is not displayed, leaving the player with a sense of anticipation that the intermediate decorative pattern DI3 will change again and then temporarily stop on a symbol that will result in a jackpot, resulting in a revival win effect (not shown). For this reason, it is desirable to configure the resurrection win effect to be executable with a low probability (for example, 1.5% of the time a jackpot occurs).

Next, as shown in Figure 52 (5), the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is returned from the number form to the number character form (see Figure 23) and enlarged and displayed, and a swinging emphasis effect is executed in synchronization (synchronization) with the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center.

Next, at t17 in Figure 27 (2), as shown in Figure 52 (6), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, indicating a loss.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at t16 in Figure 27 (2), as shown in Figure 52 (7), an image of the SPSP battle victory is displayed against the SPSP reach background, and an SPSP victory highlight effect is executed against the SPSP reach background, etc. The SPSP victory highlight effect is an effect that emphasizes that the result of the SPSP reach is a jackpot (SPSP battle victory), and is, for example, an effect that displays a unique lighting effect that causes the entire SPSP reach background to light up on a large scale (for example, the entire display screen to light up), and outputs a unique sound effect "Ta-da-da-da" (sound 9/10) (see Figure 63, etc.).

Also, at t16 in FIG. 27 (2), as shown in FIG. 52 (7), similar to FIG. 51 (5), the central decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that results in a jackpot, and a special temporary stop emphasis effect is executed on the central decorative symbol DI3. This special temporary stop emphasis effect (temporary stop emphasis effect when a doublet occurs) executes an effect different from the normal temporary stop emphasis effect (FIG. 32), and for example, a special light-emitting effect is displayed. Furthermore, no oscillation emphasis effect is executed on the temporarily stopped central decorative symbol DI3. Note that when the central decorative symbol DI3 temporarily stops on a symbol that results in a jackpot, the temporary stop emphasis effect may not be executed, and the above-mentioned special sound effect "Ta-da-da!" may not be output. Furthermore, at least a portion (e.g., light-emitting effect) of the above-mentioned SPSP victory emphasis effect and SP victory emphasis effect may be the same or different.

Next, as shown in Figure 52 (8), similar to Figure 51 (6), the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped are returned from the number form to the number character form (see Figure 23) and enlarged, and a doublet formation highlighting effect is executed (see Figures 44, 45, 61, etc.). Note that the doublet formation highlighting effect may differ depending on the performance scene (for example, the scene in Figure 52 (8) and the scene in Figure 51 (6)).

Next, as shown in Figure 52 (9), a pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect is executed for the left, right, and center decorative patterns, similar to Figure 51 (7) (see Figures 46, 47, 61, etc.). Note that the pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect may differ depending on the scene of the effect (for example, the scene in Figure 52 (9) and the scene in Figure 51 (7)).

Next, at t17 in Figure 27 (2), as shown in Figure 52 (10), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, indicating a jackpot.

As explained above, in this embodiment, various effects with different presentation meanings (cut-in preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, reach effects, SP reach effects, chance eye effects, specific result preview effects, etc.) are executed in the notification effects (variable effects), and each of these various effects is emphasized during the execution of each effect (see Figures 28 to 52, etc.). By executing emphasis effects in this way, this embodiment makes it possible to suggest (hint), announce, or emphasize the presentation meaning of each of the various effects described above, thereby synergistically enhancing the presentation effect of the notification effects.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 53 to 55. The second embodiment is an embodiment in which a re-lottery effect is executed in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment.

The re-lottery effect involves temporarily stopping decorative symbols in a combination (double number) that indicates a jackpot in the notification effect to initially announce a jackpot, then temporarily changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbols to a double number, and then temporarily stopping the decorative symbols again in a combination (double number) that indicates a jackpot, making it appear as if the type of jackpot has changed depending on the decorative symbols that temporarily stopped (i.e., it is an effect that makes it appear as if the type of jackpot has changed by lottery). As already explained, there are two types of jackpots: regular jackpots, in which the game is set to regular play after a jackpot, and time-limited jackpots, in which the game is set to time-limited play after a jackpot, making it possible to win a jackpot via a minor jackpot. In the notification effect, a time-limited jackpot is indicated when decorative symbols align with 3 or 7, and a regular jackpot is indicated when decorative symbols align with any other than 3 or 7.

Figures 53 and 54 are specific diagrams used to explain the re-draw effect when a normal jackpot is initially suggested and then changes to a time-limited jackpot (when the jackpot is upgraded) and when this does not occur (when the jackpot is not upgraded). Below, using Figures 53 and 54, we will explain the re-draw effect when a normal jackpot is initially suggested and then changes to a time-limited jackpot (when the jackpot is upgraded) and when this does not occur (when the jackpot is not upgraded).

First, after the SP battle is won in the SP Reach effect and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a doublet (see Figure 51 (5)) (or after the SPSP battle is won in the SPSP Reach effect and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a doublet (see Figure 52 (7))), as shown in Figure 53 (1), the same effects as in Figures 51 (6) and 52 (8) are executed, and a doublet highlighting effect is executed for the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center.

Next, as shown in Figure 53 (2), the same effect as in Figure 51 (7) and Figure 52 (9) is executed, and a pattern confirmation suggestion effect is executed, indicating that the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 53 (3), a re-draw effect is executed. Specifically, a re-draw effect is executed in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size and re-varied while a re-draw background dedicated to the re-draw effect (for example, a background of a thundercloud with lightning flashing) is displayed, and a re-draw emphasis effect is executed. The re-draw emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes the re-draw effect (re-draw background), and includes a unique action (for example, an action), a light-emitting effect (for example, the entire re-draw background lights up on a large scale, and the sound effect "goong" (volume 5/10) (see Figure 65, etc.). The action of displaying a reduced decorative pattern and re-changing it may be considered part of the re-draw emphasis effect. Also, when re-changing, the decorative pattern may be changed from a number character form to a number form (see Figure 23). Also, the decorative pattern may be hidden during re-changing, or the display of re-changing itself may not be executed. Also, a movable role effect may be executed in which movable role object 73 (see Figure 1) is moved to the front of screen 70 during re-changing, so that part or all of the decorative pattern during re-changing is hidden (difficult to see or impossible to see).

Next, if the game does not progress to a time-limited jackpot, as shown in Figure 53 (4), the decorative symbols that were displayed in a reduced size and then re-changing are enlarged to fill the entire screen with matching symbols indicating a normal jackpot (temporary stop display), and a promotion failure double-digit highlight effect is executed. The promotion failure double-digit highlight effect is an effect that emphasizes the matching symbols indicating a normal jackpot (promotion failure), and includes unique character actions (e.g., a winning action in which the character raises a cheer), lighting effects (e.g., small lighting of decorative symbols on the left, right, and center), and a "thud" sound effect (volume 6/10) (see Figure 65, etc.). Note that a re-draw background may also be displayed during this promotion failure effect. Furthermore, when enlarging the matching symbols indicating a normal jackpot (temporary stop display), the enlargement may extend beyond the screen 70 (become partially visible).

Next, as shown in Figure 53 (5), a pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect is executed, indicating that the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center during the temporary stop will be confirmed (see Figures 46, 47, 61, etc.). Here, the light-up effect of the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect in the re-draw effect differs from the flashing light of Figure 46, in which the reflective part moves from bottom to top, in that the reflective part moves from the bottom right to the top right. The sound effects are also different. Note that at least a part of the pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (for example, the light-up effect) may be varied or made larger (or smaller) in scale depending on the scene of the effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 53 (6), the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 that were temporarily stopped on the left, right, and center are reduced to their original size and displayed as fixed stops, similar to the effects in Figure 51 (8) and other figures, and finally, a normal jackpot is announced.

On the other hand, when the game is promoted to a time-saving jackpot, the presentation changes from FIG. 53 (3) to FIG. 54 (1), and as shown in FIG. 54 (1), the decorative symbols that were displayed in a reduced size and then re-changing are enlarged (temporarily stopped) to fill the entire screen with matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot, and a promotion success double-digit highlighting presentation is executed. The promotion success double-digit highlighting presentation is a presentation that emphasizes the matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot (promotion success), and includes unique character actions (e.g., a winning action in which the character raises a hand), lighting effects (e.g., decorative symbols on the left, right, and center illuminate on a large scale), and a "boom, boom, boom" sound effect (volume 9/10) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that a re-draw background may also be displayed during this promotion success presentation. Furthermore, when the matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot are enlarged (temporarily stopped), they may be enlarged until they extend beyond the screen 70 (are partially cut off).

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (2), the same effect as in Figure 53 (2) is performed, and the re-draw effect highlighting the symbol confirmation suggestion is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (3), the same effect as in Figure 51 (6) is played, and the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that had been temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, and finally, a time-saving jackpot is announced.

Figure 55 is a specific diagram to explain the re-draw effect in which a time-saving jackpot is first suggested, then a re-draw effect is executed to suggest a time-saving jackpot again. Below, we will use Figure 55 to explain the re-draw effect in which a time-saving jackpot is first suggested, then a re-draw effect is executed to suggest a time-saving jackpot again.

First, after the SP battle is won in the SP Reach effect and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a double number (see Figure 51 (5)) (or after the SPSP battle is won in the SPSP Reach effect and the decorative symbols temporarily stop with a double number (see Figure 52 (7))), as shown in Figure 55 (1), a presentation similar to Figure 53 (1) is executed, and the decorative symbols on the left, right, and center are displayed temporarily stopped with matching patterns that normally indicate a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (2), a presentation similar to that shown in Figure 53 (2) is executed, and a pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting presentation is executed, indicating that the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (3), a similar effect to that shown in Figure 53 (3) is executed, and a re-lottery effect is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (4), the same effect as in Figure 54 (1) is executed, and the decorative symbols that were displayed in a reduced size and then changed again are enlarged to fill the entire screen (temporary stop display) as matching symbols indicating a time-saving jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (5), the same effect as in Figure 54 (2) is performed, and the re-draw effect's symbol confirmation suggestion highlight effect is executed. Here, since this symbol confirmation suggestion highlight effect does not indicate successful promotion, it does not indicate successful promotion, but rather suggests that a time-saving jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (6), the same effect as in Figure 54 (3) is played, and the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center that had been temporarily stopped are displayed as fixed stops, and finally, a time-saving jackpot is announced.

As explained above, in this embodiment, various emphasis effects and the like are used in the re-lottery effect in the notification effect, thereby effectively enhancing the effect of the re-lottery effect. For example, the symbol confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (see FIG. 53 (3)) before the re-lottery effect is executed suggests that at least a jackpot has been won, the symbol confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (see FIG. 54 (2)) for successful promotion after the re-lottery effect is executed suggests that a time-saving jackpot has been won, and the symbol confirmation suggestion emphasis effect (see FIG. 53 (5)) for unsuccessful promotion after the re-lottery effect is executed suggests that a regular jackpot has been won. Note that if the ball temporarily stops on a symbol for a time-saving jackpot, as in FIG. 55 (1), the re-lottery effect may not be executed. Furthermore, although examples of executing a re-lottery effect in the notification effect for the "SP hit" and "SPSP hit" presentation patterns (see FIG. 12, etc.) have been explained above, a re-lottery effect may also be executed in the notification effect for the "reach hit" presentation pattern.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 56. In the third embodiment, the special symbol 400 is displayed during the execution of the notification effect in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment.

As shown in Figure 56, the special symbol 400 is displayed small in a predetermined position on the screen 70 (the lower right position in Figure 57), and includes left and right diamond-shaped images (diamond images), left and right number hold icons displayed above the left and right diamond images, respectively, and left and right center number symbols (number symbol strings) displayed below the left and right diamond images. Note that Figure 56 shows an enlarged view of the special symbol 400 for ease of explanation.

The left diamond image is displayed in white during the execution of the notification effect that notifies the result of the first special symbol lottery, and is displayed in gray during other periods. The right diamond image is displayed in white during the execution of the notification effect that notifies the result of the second special symbol lottery, and is displayed in gray during other periods. In other words, the left and right diamond images are images that notify whether the notification effect for the first symbol lottery or the notification effect for the second symbol lottery is being executed.
The left number reserve icon is an image that indicates the number of reserved balls in the first special pattern lottery by number, and the right number reserve icon is an image that indicates the number of reserved balls in the second special pattern lottery by number. Like the reserve icon RI, the left and right number reserve icons are designs that suggest (inform) the number of reserved balls in the special pattern lottery. However, unlike the reserve icon RI, they do not perform effects that suggest the reliability of a jackpot or are involved in various effects, but rather are designs that clearly suggest (inform) the number of reserved balls in the special pattern lottery. In other words, while the reserve icon RI emphasizes presentation effects, the left and right number reserve icons emphasize clearly suggesting (informing) the number of reserved balls in the special pattern lottery.

Like the decorative patterns DI1-DI3 on the left and right, the number patterns on the left and right are patterns that suggest (announce) the results of the special pattern lottery by changing and then stopping, but unlike the decorative patterns DI1-DI3 on the left and right, they do not perform or are involved in various effects, and are instead patterns that clearly suggest (announce) the results of the special pattern lottery. In other words, while the decorative patterns DI1-DI3 on the left and right place emphasis on the effect of the effects, the number patterns on the left and right place emphasis on clearly suggesting (announce) the results of the special pattern lottery.

The special symbol 400 will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.
As shown in Figure 56 (1), when the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 in the left, right, and center are displayed as fixed stops before the start of the notification performance, the special pattern 400 has the diamond images on the left and right displayed in gray, and the number patterns in the left and right centers are displayed as fixed stops with the same numbers as the decorative patterns in the left and right centers that are displayed as fixed stops.

Next, as shown in Figure 56 (2), while the notification effect is being performed (while the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center are changing), the special pattern 400 displays one of the left and right diamond images in white, and the number patterns in the left and center are displayed changing downward. Here, the number patterns in the left and center change only downward in a cyclical manner in the order of Pattern 1 → Pattern 2 → Pattern 3 → Pattern 4 → Pattern 5 → Pattern 6 → Pattern 7 → Pattern 8 → Pattern 9 → Pattern 1, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 56 (3), when the notification effect ends and the left, right, and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 are displayed as fixed and stopped, the special pattern 400 displays the left and right diamond images in gray, and the left and right center number patterns are displayed as fixed and stopped with the same numbers as the left and right decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 that are displayed as fixed and stopped.

Here, the left, right and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 which emphasize the presentation effect change their fluctuation speeds, but the left and right center number patterns of the special pattern 400 are displayed fluctuating at a fixed constant speed faster than the fluctuation speeds of the left, right and center decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 (the fluctuation speed does not change).
Furthermore, unlike the decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center of the special pattern 400, which emphasize presentation effects, the number patterns on the left, right, and center do not change appearance (including color change), are not enlarged or reduced in size, and do not emit light.
Furthermore, unlike the reserve icon RI which emphasizes dramatic effect, the number reserve icons on the left and right of the special pattern 400 do not change appearance (including color change) or emit light.
In addition, the number symbols in the center of the left and right of the special symbol 400 are in reach of winning just like the decorative symbols DI1 to DI3 in the center of the left and right that emphasize the performance effect, but do not perform reach-inducing performance. Note that the number symbols in the center of the left and right of the special symbol 400 may not be in reach of winning, and may change even when the decorative symbols in the center of the left and right are in reach of winning.
Furthermore, unlike decorative patterns, the special pattern 400 is displayed at the same size at a specific position (fixed position) on the screen 70 during at least one notification performance period (or at all times).
In addition, the number patterns of the special pattern 400 are of nine types, from pattern 1 to pattern 9, which is fewer types than the decorative patterns that have consecutive patterns that are different from normal patterns.
Moreover, unlike the decorative patterns, the number patterns of the special pattern 400 move (varies) only in a certain direction (downward, etc.).
Furthermore, unlike decorative patterns, the special pattern 400 is not partially (or entirely) hidden by the movable role object 73 when the movable role object performance is executed.
In addition, the special symbol 400 is not displayed during a jackpot game (during a jackpot game presentation).
Moreover, unlike decorative symbols, etc., the special symbol 400 does not execute various light-emitting effects, etc. Furthermore, the special symbol 400 is not affected by various effect images (decorative symbols, etc.) or various light-emitting effects (light-emitting effects such as temporary stop highlighting effects and SP development highlighting effects) that do not overlap in front of it.
Furthermore, unlike the decorative symbols, the number symbols of the special symbols 400 are not displayed as a temporary stop as one form of variable display, and are displayed as a variable even when, for example, the decorative symbols are in a temporary stop state and a symbol confirmation suggestion highlight effect is being performed. Note that the number symbols of the special symbols 400 may also be displayed as a temporary stop, just like the decorative symbols.

As explained above, in this embodiment, decorative patterns DI1 to DI3 on the left, right, and center are displayed, emphasizing presentation effects, and the special pattern 400 is also displayed to clearly indicate (indicate) the results of the special pattern lottery. Furthermore, the special pattern 400 does not perform any light-emitting effects, and is not affected by light-emitting effects, etc.

[Comparison table of highlighting effects]
57 to 66 are comparison tables of various highlighting effects described in each embodiment, etc. As shown in Fig. 57 to 66, the characteristics of the various highlighting effects described in each embodiment, etc. can synergistically enhance the presentation effect of the notification effect.

For example, the reach completion highlighting effect (see Figure 59) may include a horizontal line-shaped lighting effect with a narrower lighting area connecting the left and right decorative patterns, compared to the SP development highlighting effect (see Figure 63) or SPSP development highlighting effect (see Figure 63) which can be executed afterwards and in which the entire background screen can be illuminated.
Furthermore, for example, the effect emphasizing the completion of a reach (e.g., Figure 40 (1)) may include a horizontal line-shaped light-emitting effect in which the width of the light-emitting area connecting the left and right decorative patterns is narrower than the chance eye light-emitting effect (Figure 36) in which the left, right, and center decorative patterns that form the chance eye and the surrounding area can be illuminated.
Furthermore, for example, the reach completion highlighting effect includes the above-mentioned line-shaped light-emitting effect, and has a different light-emitting area and light-emitting range from the pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect (Figures 61, 46, etc.) in which the light-emitting effect moves, for example, from bottom to top, only on the surface of each decorative pattern.
Also, for example, the reach establishment highlighting effect includes the above-mentioned line-shaped light emission, and the light-emitting area and light-emitting range are different from the pattern confirmation suggestion highlighting effect (see Figures 61 and 47) in which the light-emitting effect spreads from the middle decorative pattern to the entire screen.
Furthermore, for example, the change start emphasis effect (see Figures 57 and 31) and the temporary stop emphasis effect (see Figures 57 and 32) subtly (weakly) emphasize the decorative pattern and its surroundings, and are smaller in scale and have a narrower light-emitting range than flashy emphasis effects that aim for a greater effect (chance eye emphasis effect, SP development emphasis effect, SPSP development emphasis effect, double-digit establishment emphasis effect, etc.).
Also, for example, in the SP victory highlighting effect (see FIG. 63), the entire screen of the SP reach background is illuminated strongly, while in the SP defeat highlighting effect (see FIG. 63), the entire screen of the SP reach background is illuminated weakly. Note that the illumination range of the SP defeat highlighting effect may be narrower than the illumination range of the SP victory highlighting effect. The same applies to the relationship between the SP SP victory illumination and the SP SP defeat illumination.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 57 to 66, depending on the highlighting effect, there are various "maximum ratio of the highlighting area to the entire decorative pattern,""maximum ratio of the highlighting area to the entire decorative pattern," and "maximum ratio of the highlighting area to the entire screen" (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "three ratios"). Here, in the above three ratios, the "highlighting area" may be considered, for example, as the area where character movements and light-emitting effects are performed, or as the area where light-emitting effects are performed. Note that in the descriptions of these ratios (descriptions in %) in Figures 57 to 66, relatively desirable ratios (%) are underlined, but this is not limiting.
For example, the proportion of the shaking emphasis effect may be smaller than the proportion of the temporary stop emphasis effect, the fluctuation start emphasis effect, the reach establishment emphasis effect, the double number establishment emphasis effect, etc.
Also, for example, the ratio of three for the reach miss highlighting effect may be smaller than that for the reach success highlighting effect and the doublet success highlighting effect.
Also, for example, the proportion of temporary stop emphasis effects and change start emphasis effects may be smaller than the proportion of reach establishment emphasis effects and doublet establishment emphasis effects.
Here, the chance eye emphasis effect is an emphasis effect that is executed when the variation stops (more precisely, before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped), so it can be considered a type of temporary stop emphasis effect. Also, the variation start notice emphasis effect, which will be described later, is an emphasis effect that is executed when the variation starts, so it can be considered a type of variation start emphasis effect. In that case, the chance eye emphasis effect and the variation stop notice emphasis effect may have a larger proportion of the three than the normal temporary stop emphasis effect and variation start emphasis effect.

Note that the various features of the emphasis effects described in the comparison tables in Figures 57 to 66 and other figures are merely examples and are not limiting. For example, emphasis effects that are expected to have a high effect (e.g., reach completion emphasis effects, SP development emphasis effects, etc.) may be characterized by strong light emission, light emission over a wide area, loud sound effects, or flashy action. Furthermore, emphasis effects that are not expected to have a high effect (e.g., fluctuation start emphasis effects, temporary stop emphasis effects, etc.) may be characterized by weak light emission, light emission over a narrow area, quiet sound effects (or no sound effects), or modest action (or no action). Furthermore, the aspect of each emphasis effect may differ depending on the game state, effect stage (effect mode), or effect scene (e.g., before or after a specific effect (e.g., reach completion effect, SP reach development effect, etc.)).

(Fourth embodiment)
The fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. In the fourth embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, when the effect button 16 is operated in a predetermined manner during the valid operation period (e.g., 5 seconds) during which the effect button 16 is accepted, an operation-responsive effect is executed, which enables the execution of a predetermined effect (e.g., a predetermined advance notice effect, a movable role effect, etc.). Furthermore, in order to enhance the effect of the operation-responsive effect, an operation prompt effect is executed during the valid operation period to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation of the effect button 16. The operation prompt effect includes the display of an operation prompt image 351 (specifically, an image including a button image imitating the effect button 16, a gauge image dynamically indicating the remaining valid operation period, and a text image (e.g., "Press!")). Hereinafter, an operation prompt image including a gauge image or the like may be referred to as a button image. The operation prompt effect may also include audio output (e.g., "Press!"). In addition, in this embodiment, there are a single press operation response effect that executes an operation response effect in response to the effect button 16 being pressed once during the valid operation period, a rapid press operation response effect that executes an operation response effect in response to the effect button 16 being pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) during the valid operation period, and a long press operation response effect that executes an operation response effect in response to the effect button 16 being pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) during the valid operation period.

With reference to Figure 67, an example of a single-press operation response effect will be described. First, as shown in Figure 67 (1), a button image emphasis effect is executed to emphasize the button image 351 (see Figure 65, etc.). Specifically, at the position where the button image 351 is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 16, a light-emitting effect 350 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) to emphasize the button image 351 in advance and to suggest that the button image 351 will be displayed. Note that a unique sound effect may also be output as part of the button image emphasis effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(2), button image 351 is displayed. Here, button image 351 begins to be displayed just before the display of light-emitting effect 350 ends (e.g., 0.1 seconds before). In other words, button image 351 and light-emitting effect 350 are displayed simultaneously for a moment. Here, light-emitting effect 350 is translucent (e.g., 50% transparency) and larger than button image 351, so button image 351 can be seen through light-emitting effect 350 behind it. Note that the displayed button image 351 may also display another light-emitting effect (different from light-emitting effect 350) that emphasizes button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 67(2), a button highlight effect that emphasizes button 16 is executed together with the display of button image 351 (linked to the display of button image 351) (see FIG. 65, etc.). The button highlight effect is an effect that emphasizes button 16, and is an effect that causes button 16 to emit light, vibrate, or protrude (the button portion protrudes, for example, 5 cm). In Figure 67 (2), the effect button 16 is illuminated and vibrated. Note that the vibration of the effect button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered an effect button emphasis effect. In addition, the effect button emphasis effect may include a sound effect specific to the effect button (a sound effect output from a speaker).

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), when the effect button 16 is pressed (pressed once) within the valid operation period, a button image highlighting effect is executed to highlight the button image 351 when the button image 351 disappears (is hidden) in response (see FIG. 65, etc.), and the button highlighting effect ends. The valid operation period also ends (even before its expiration). Specifically, a light-emitting effect 352 that highlights the button image 351 (emphasizes the disappearance of the button image 351) is displayed at the position where the button image 351 was displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.7 seconds). The button image 351 is hidden immediately (e.g., 0.2 seconds after the light-emitting effect 352 begins to be displayed). In other words, the button image 351 and the light-emitting effect 352 are displayed simultaneously for a moment. Because the light-emitting effect 352 is translucent (e.g., 50% transparency) and larger than the button image 351, the button image 351 can be seen through the light-emitting effect 352. A unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. Additionally, by continuing the button highlighting effect even after the button image 351 disappears, it may be possible to indicate a high probability of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (4), an operation response effect (such as a preview effect) is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 16. Note that the gauge image and text image ("Press!") shown in Figure 67 (2) can also be considered as part of a button image emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompt image (i.e., the button image), rather than as an operation prompt image. The button emphasis effect may also start when the light-emitting effect 350 is displayed, or may start earlier.

Next, with reference to Figure 68, an example of a rapid-fire operation response effect will be described. First, as shown in Figure 68 (1), a button image highlighting effect is executed to highlight the button image 351, similar to Figure 67 (1) (see Figure 65, etc.). Note that a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect.

Next, in the case of a Type 1 rapid-fire operation response effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (2-1), an effect similar to that in FIG. 67 (2) is performed, and button image 351 is displayed. However, in FIG. 68 (2-1), the text image "Rapid!" is displayed. Note that the displayed button image 351 may also display another lighting effect (a lighting effect different from lighting effect 350) that emphasizes button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (2-1), similar to FIG. 67 (2), a button emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect button 16 is executed together with the display of button image 351 (linked to the display of button image 351) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that the vibration of the effect button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered a button emphasis effect. Furthermore, a sound effect unique to the button emphasis effect (a sound effect output from a speaker) may also be included.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-1), when the effect button 16 is repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held) within the valid operation period, a button image highlighting effect is executed in response, emphasizing the button image 351 (see FIG. 65, etc.). Specifically, while the effect button 16 is being repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held), a translucent light-emitting effect 353 (light-emitting effect 353 larger than the button image 351) that highlights the button image 351 is displayed in the position where the button image 351 was displayed, and a button image rapid tapping motion display is performed in which the button image 351 periodically moves up and down, as if it were being tapped repeatedly. Note that, in conjunction with this button image rapid tapping motion display, the button image may flash as part of the button image highlighting effect. Furthermore, a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. Furthermore, the button image rapid tapping motion display can be considered part of the button image highlighting effect. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-1), the button highlighting effect that emphasizes the effect button 16 continues in a different highlighting mode (for example, a different light-emitting color) or in the same highlighting mode.

On the other hand, in the case of a Type 2 rapid-press operation response effect, the button image 351 is displayed as in FIG. 68 (2-1), and then a button image rapid-press action display is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (2-2). Note that the button image 351 on which the button image rapid-press action display is performed may display another lighting effect (a lighting effect different from lighting effect 350) that emphasizes the button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (2-2), similar to FIG. 67 (2), a button emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect button 16 is executed together with the display of the button image 351 (linked to the display of the button image 351) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that the vibration of the effect button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered a button emphasis effect. Furthermore, a sound effect specific to the button emphasis effect (a sound effect output from a speaker) may be included.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-2), when the effect button 16 is repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held) within the valid operation period, a button image highlighting effect is executed in response, highlighting the button image 351 (see FIG. 65, etc.). Specifically, while the effect button 16 is being repeatedly tapped (or pressed and held), a translucent light-emitting effect 353 that highlights the button image 351 is displayed in the position where the button image 351 was displayed, and the button image rapid tapping motion display continues. Note that, in conjunction with this button image rapid tapping motion display, the button image may flash as part of the button image highlighting effect. Furthermore, a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (3-2), the button highlighting effect that highlights the effect button 16 continues in a different highlighting mode (for example, a different light-emitting color) or in the same highlighting mode.

After Figure 68 (3-1) or (3-2), as shown in Figure 68 (4), when the conditions for executing the operation response effect (for example, 10 consecutive presses or a long press for 3 seconds) are met, the button image 351, the button image highlighting effect, and the button highlighting effect are terminated, and the operation response effect (such as a preview effect) is executed. At that time, the valid operation period also ends (even if it has not yet expired). Note that the gauge image and text image ("Continuous Press!") shown in Figure 68 can be considered not as an operation prompt image, but as part of the button image highlighting effect that highlights the operation prompt image (i.e., the button image). The button image rapid press action display can also be considered part of the button image highlighting effect.

Next, with reference to Figure 69, an example of a long press operation response effect will be described. First, as shown in Figure 69 (1), a button image highlighting effect is executed to highlight the button image 351, similar to Figure 67 (1) (see Figure 65, etc.). Note that a unique sound effect may be output as part of the button image highlighting effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(2), a similar effect to that in FIG. 67(2) is performed, and button image 351 is displayed. However, in FIG. 69(2), the text image "Long Press!" is displayed. Note that the displayed button image 351 may also display another lighting effect (a lighting effect different from lighting effect 350) that emphasizes button image 351. Also, as shown in FIG. 69(2), similar to FIG. 67(2), a button emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect button 16 is executed together with the display of button image 351 (linked to the display of button image 351) (see FIG. 65, etc.). Note that the vibration of effect button 16 is accompanied by a physical vibration sound, and this vibration sound can also be considered a button emphasis effect. Furthermore, a sound effect specific to the button emphasis effect (a sound effect output from a speaker) may be included.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), if the effect button 16 is pressed and held for a predetermined time (e.g., three seconds) within the valid operation period, a button image highlighting effect is executed to highlight the button image 351 (see FIG. 65, etc.). The valid operation period ends (even before it expires). Specifically, while the effect button 16 is being pressed and held, a translucent light-emitting effect 353 (light-emitting effect 353 larger than the button image 351) that highlights the button image 351 is displayed in the position where the button image 351 was displayed, and the button image 351 is pressed as if it had been pressed and held. Note that, along with this button image long-press display, the button image may flash as part of the button image highlighting effect. A unique sound effect may also be output as part of the button image highlighting effect. The button image long-press display can also be considered part of the button image highlighting effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), the button highlighting effect that highlights the effect button 16 continues in a different highlighting mode (e.g., a different light-emitting color) or in the same highlighting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), when the conditions for executing the operation response effect (e.g., a long press for 3 seconds) are met, the button image 351, button image emphasis effect, and button emphasis effect end, and the operation response effect (such as a preview effect) is executed. Note that the gauge image and text image ("Long press!") shown in FIG. 69 can also be considered part of the button image emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompt image (i.e., the button image), rather than as an operation prompt image. Furthermore, in the single press operation response effect, rapid press operation response effect, and long press operation response effect shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, the aspects of the corresponding emphasis effect (e.g., light-emitting effect 350) may be different from each other.

As described above, according to this embodiment, various highlighting effects that emphasize operation prompt images (button images) can be implemented, significantly increasing the entertainment value of the effects.

Fifth Embodiment
70 to 77, the fifth embodiment will be described below. In the fifth embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, a volume gauge and a light intensity gauge are displayed on the main image display unit 70, and control is performed to prevent a decrease in the visibility of these gauges.
The volume gauge is a gauge that indicates the volume (maximum volume) output from the speaker 9. The light intensity gauge is a gauge that indicates the amount of light (maximum light intensity) output from the movable role object 73, the effect button 16, the board lamp, the frame lamp, etc. In this embodiment, the light intensity of the main image display unit 70 and the sub-image display unit 71 is not adjusted, but the light intensity of the main image display unit 70 and the sub-image display unit 71 may also be adjustable in the same way as (simultaneously with) the board lamp, etc.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a volume gauge 360 and a light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display section 70. As shown in FIG.
The volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 are both displayed simultaneously when any key on the cross key 18 (or the back key 170) is pressed, and both are hidden when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation of the cross key 18. Note that the volume gauge 360 may be displayed/hidden in conjunction with the operation of the up and down keys on the cross key 18, and the light gauge 361 may be displayed/hidden in conjunction with the operation of the left and right keys on the cross key 18. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only the volume gauge 360 is displayed when any key on the back key 170 is pressed.

As shown in Fig. 70, the volume gauge 360 includes a scale display and a character display indicating the current volume (maximum volume), and an operation method display suggesting that the volume can be changed using the up and down keys of the cross key 18. In Fig. 70, five scales are displayed as the scale display, and "volume 5" is displayed as the character display. The maximum value of the scale display and the character display of the volume gauge 360 is "7."
70, the light amount gauge 361 includes a scale display showing the current light amount (maximum light amount), a character display showing the light amount, and an operation method display suggesting that the light amount can be changed using the left and right keys of the cross key 18. In FIG. 70, the scale display shows four marks, and the character display shows "light amount 4." The maximum value of the scale display and character display of the light amount gauge 361 is "7." Note that the maximum values of the scale display and character display of the volume gauge 360 and the light amount gauge 361 may be different.

Figure 71 shows an example of the display of the volume gauge 360 and light intensity gauge 361 when the directional pad 18 is operated. As shown in Figure 71 (1), when the up key on the directional pad 18 is pressed once, the scale and text display of the volume gauge 360 increase by one, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 increases by one level. As shown in Figure 71 (2), when the down key on the directional pad 18 is pressed once, the scale and text display of the volume gauge 360 decrease by one, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 decreases by one level. As shown in Figure 71 (3), when the right key on the directional pad 18 is pressed once, the scale and text display of the light intensity gauge 361 increase by one, and the light intensity of the gaming machine 1 increases by one level. As shown in Figure 71 (4), when the left key on the directional pad 18 is pressed once, the scale and text display of the light intensity gauge 361 decrease by one, and the light intensity of the gaming machine 1 decreases by one level.

Figure 72 shows an example in which the display (and maximum volume) of the volume gauge 360 changes when a gaming parlor staff member or the like operates the rear key 170 on the back of the gaming board. As shown in Figure 72 (1), when the rear key 170 that increases the volume is pressed once, the scale display and text display of the volume gauge 360 increase by two, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 increases by two levels. As shown in Figure 72 (2), when the rear key 170 that decreases the volume is pressed once, the scale display and text display of the volume gauge 360 decrease by two, and the volume of the gaming machine 1 decreases by two levels.

Figure 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation for setting the upper limit of the maximum volume of the gaming machine 1 (speaker 9). First, a store clerk or the like at the gaming facility performs a predetermined operation (e.g., password entry operation) on the directional pad 18 and effect button 16, which displays a system menu (not shown) for the store clerk or the like to operate. Then, when the store clerk or the like selects "Maximum Volume Limit Setting" displayed on the system menu, a maximum volume limit setting screen such as that shown in Figure 73 (1) is displayed on the main image display unit 70.

As shown in Figure 73 (1), the maximum volume limit setting screen displays a volume scale 363 consisting of seven scales from 1 to 7, and a cursor 362 for specifying one of the scales on the volume scale 363. The cursor 362 specifies the upper limit of the maximum volume of the speaker 9, and the volume of the scale specified (positioned) by the cursor 362 is set as the upper limit of the maximum volume of the speaker 9 (i.e., the maximum volume that can be output). Note that the seven scales on the volume scale 363 correspond to the seven scales on the volume gauge 360 described using Figure 70 etc.

Each time the left key or down key of the cross key 18 is pressed, the cursor 362 moves one scale to the left (in the direction in which the upper limit of the maximum volume decreases), and each time the right key or up key of the cross key 18 is pressed, the cursor 362 moves one scale to the right (in the direction in which the upper limit of the maximum volume increases). In the example of Figure 73 (1), the cursor 362 is pointing to the fifth scale on the volume scale 363, and the upper limit of the maximum volume of the speaker 9 is set to the fifth scale (i.e., the setting value of the upper limit of the maximum volume is set to 5). In this case, the maximum volume that can be adjusted by operating the cross key 18 or the back key 170 described with reference to Figures 71 and 72 is limited to scales 1 to 5 (i.e., it cannot be set to scale 6 or higher).
In this way, by performing a predetermined operation on the maximum volume limit setting screen, it is possible to set the upper limit of the maximum volume of the gaming machine 1 (speaker 9), thereby adjusting (limiting) the upper limit of the volume throughout the gaming facility as a whole.

Figure 73 (2) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the maximum volume limit setting and the maximum volume. As shown in Figure 73 (2), for example, if the maximum volume limit setting is 5, the maximum volume of the speaker 9 will be limited to 85 dB (decibels). Note that error sounds that alert you to possible fraudulent activity (for example, abnormal magnetic detection, abnormal shaking, abnormal winning, etc.) are output at a predetermined volume (for example, the volume of scale 7) regardless of the maximum volume limit setting.

Figure 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of control to prevent a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70.

First, as shown in Fig. 74(1), a volume gauge 360 and a light intensity gauge 361 are displayed. In Fig. 74(1), the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped to perform a swing emphasis effect, and the center right decorative symbol is scrolling at high speed, and the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361 are displayed at the position of the center right decorative symbol that is scrolling at high speed.
Next, as shown in Figure 74 (2), when a reach is achieved and a reach achievement highlighting effect is executed, and the light emitting effect 310 is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361, the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are controlled and moved to a position where they do not overlap with the light emitting effect 310. Also, in Figure 74 (2), the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are displayed in a reduced size due to limited space.

Figure 75 is an example of a flowchart of control to prevent a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70. This is explained below.

First, in step S300 of FIG. 75, the CPU 501 of the image and audio control unit 500 determines whether the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are being displayed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S301; if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S300.

In step S301, the CPU 501 determines whether a predetermined emphasis effect is to be executed. The predetermined emphasis effect is, for example, one of the emphasis effects shown in Figures 57 to 66, and in the example of Figure 74, it is a reach-achi emphasis effect. Note that it may also be determined whether all emphasis effects are to be executed, rather than a predetermined emphasis effect. If the determination is YES, processing proceeds to step S302; if the determination is NO, processing returns to step S300.

In step S302, the CPU 501 determines whether the display of the specified emphasis effect determined to be executed in step S301 will affect the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361. Specifically, the CPU 501 determines whether the display of this specified emphasis effect will be displayed in a position that overlaps the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S303; if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S300.

In step S303, the CPU 501 moves the volume gauge 360 and light intensity gauge 361 to a position that is not affected by (does not overlap with) the display of the specified emphasis effect (lighting effect 310) determined to be executed in step S301. At this time, the CPU 501 may also reduce the size of the volume gauge 360 and light intensity gauge 361 depending on the space to which they are moved. Processing then returns to step S300.

By controlling in this manner, the effect of the display of specified highlighting effects on the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361 can be limited, preventing a decrease in the visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361.

Figure 76 is a diagram illustrating another example of control to prevent a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70.

First, as shown in FIG. 76(1), a volume gauge 360 and a light intensity gauge 361 are displayed, similar to FIG. 74(1).
Next, as shown in Fig. 76(2), when the time comes when a reach is achieved and the reach achievement highlighting effect is executed, as shown in Fig. 76(3), the reach is achieved and the reach achievement highlighting effect is executed and the sound effect "Zukun" of the reach achievement highlighting effect is output. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 76(3), the light emitting effect 310 of the reach achievement highlighting effect (see Fig. 74(2)) is restricted from being executed and is not executed.

Figure 76 is another example of a flowchart of control to prevent a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70. This is explained below.

Figure 77 is another example of a flowchart of control to prevent a decrease in visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361 displayed on the main image display unit 70. This is explained below.

First, in step S310 of FIG. 77, the CPU 501 of the image and audio control unit 500 determines whether the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361 are being displayed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S311; if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S310.

In step S311, the CPU 501 determines whether a predetermined emphasis effect is to be executed. The predetermined emphasis effect is, for example, one of the emphasis effects shown in Figures 57 to 66, and in the example of Figure 77, it is a reach-achi emphasis effect. Note that it may also be determined whether all emphasis effects are to be executed, rather than a predetermined emphasis effect. If the determination is YES, processing proceeds to step S312; if the determination is NO, processing returns to step S310.

In step S312, the CPU 501 determines whether the display of the specified emphasis effect determined to be executed in step S311 will affect the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361. Specifically, the CPU 501 determines whether the display of this specified emphasis effect will be displayed in a position that overlaps the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S313; if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S310.

In step S313, the CPU 501 restricts the execution of the specified highlighting effect (lighting effect 310) that was determined to be executed in step S311. Processing then returns to step S310.

By controlling in this manner, the effect of the display of specified highlighting effects on the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361 can be limited, preventing a decrease in the visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361.

When the up and down keys on the directional pad are operated while waiting for customers, during the notification presentation (while varying), during the small win game presentation, and during the big win game presentation, the scale on the volume gauge 360 goes up and down (see Figures 71 (1) and (2)), and an operation sound (for example, "pico") is output, whereas when the volume up/down key on the rear key 170 is operated, the scale on the volume gauge 360 goes up and down (see Figures 72 (1) and (2)), but no operation sound is output.
Also, the volume gauge 360 and the light gauge 361 may be displayed at all times while waiting for customers.
Furthermore, when the left or right key on the cross key is operated during waiting for customers, during notification presentation (variation), during small win game presentation, or during big win game presentation, the scale of the light quantity gauge 361 goes up or down (see FIG. 71 (3) (4)), and an operation sound (for example, "pico") is output. Note that the operation sound of the light quantity gauge 361 and the operation sound of the volume gauge 360 may be different.
Furthermore, the operation sound of the volume gauge 360 and/or the light quantity gauge 361 may be output with a different scale as the volume scale increases, or may always be output with the same scale.

As described above, this embodiment limits the effect of the display of a specified emphasis effect on the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361, thereby preventing a decrease in the visibility of the volume gauge 360 and light gauge 361.

Sixth Embodiment
78 to 81, the sixth embodiment will be described below. In the sixth embodiment, a right-hit notification and a left-hit notification are performed in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment. The right-hit notification notifies the player that the gaming ball should be shot toward the right gaming area, and the left-hit notification notifies the player that the gaming ball should be shot toward the left gaming area.

Figure 78 is a diagram showing an example of a right-hit notification. As shown in Figure 78, a right-hit notification is issued in a situation where a right-hit is required (sometimes referred to as a "right-hit period"; for example, during time-saving play, jackpot play, or small jackpot play). Specifically, a right-hit notification image 370 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen 70, as shown in Figure 78. The right-hit notification may also be issued during a result display (displaying results such as the number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of game balls acquired through single or consecutive jackpot play, etc.) which is executed at the end of jackpot play or when the time-saving play state ends. In addition, a right-hit notification sound ("Hit right!") may be output when the right-hit notification begins.

79 is a diagram for explaining the notification of a left-handed hit.
First, when the start condition for the left-hand hit notification is met as shown in FIG. 79(1), the left-hand hit notification is initiated as shown in FIG. 79(2). Specifically, a left-hand hit notification image 371 is displayed in the center of the screen 70, as shown in FIG. 79(2), and a left-hand hit notification sound ("Please return to left-hand hit!") is output multiple times (e.g., twice) (volume 9/10). The start condition for the left-hand hit notification is that a right-hand hit is detected during a period other than the right-hand hit period (a period during which right-hand hits would waste game balls), for example, when a predetermined number of game balls pass through the gate 44 (e.g., two game balls pass within three seconds). Note that this condition may be any condition that can detect right-hand hits. For example, if the normal winning slot 43 is provided only in the right-hand game area, the condition may be that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the normal winning slot 43.

Next, when the condition for ending the left-hit notification is met as shown in Figure 79 (3), the left-hit notification ends as shown in Figure 79 (4). The condition for ending the left-hit notification is, for example, that the output of the left-hit notification sound (e.g., output for 5 seconds) has ended multiple times (e.g., twice) as described above.

In addition, a warning sound may be output instead of or in addition to the left-hit notification sound.
Furthermore, although the volume of the left-hit notification sound and warning sound cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 18 etc. (see Figures 71 and 72), it is also possible to configure the volume of the left-hit notification sound and warning sound to be adjustable by operating the cross key 18 etc.
The left-hand hit notification may also be a two-stage notification. For example, a first left-hand hit notification may be executed as described above under the above-described start conditions for the left-hand hit notification, and a second left-hand hit notification may be executed when a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the gate 44 consecutively within a predetermined period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) after the start of the first left-hand hit notification (e.g., two game balls have passed within three seconds). In this case, the second left-hand hit notification may be larger in scale than the first left-hand hit notification (e.g., a larger left-hand hit notification display, a louder warning sound, a longer notification execution time, etc.).

Figure 80 is a time chart to explain an example of the highlighting effects (see Figures 57 to 66) that can be performed in the notification effects and the execution period of the left-hit notification. The following explanation will be given with reference to Figure 80.

First, at t1, the special symbol begins to change and the notification effect (change effect) begins. Next, at t2, the start conditions for the left-hit notification are met, and the left-hit notification begins. Next, at t3, the special symbol ends to change, the notification effect ends, and the decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop. Next, at t4, the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol ends, and the special symbol begins to change and the notification effect begins. Next, at t5, the end conditions for the left-hit notification are met, and the left-hit notification ends. Next, at t6, the start conditions for the left-hit notification are met, and the left-hit notification begins. Next, at t7, the change of the special symbol ends, the notification effect ends, and the decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop. Next, at t8, the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol ends, and since there is no notification effect to be executed next (i.e., there is no hold), the machine enters a waiting state for customers with the fixed display of the decorative symbol (fixed stop display) continuing. Next, at t9, while waiting for customers, the condition for ending the left-hand hit notification is met, and the left-hand hit notification ends.

Figure 81 is an example of a flowchart for limiting the highlighting effect (see Figures 57 to 66) being executed during the notification effect (variable effect) when the notification effect ends. This is explained below.

First, in step S320 of FIG. 81, the CPU 501 of the image and audio control unit 500 determines whether the notification effect has ended and the decorative pattern has been displayed as fixed and stopped (see t3, etc. in FIG. 80). If this determination is YES, processing proceeds to step S321; if this determination is NO, processing returns to step S320 again.

In step S321, the CPU 501 determines whether an emphasis effect (see Figures 57 to 66) is being executed. If this determination is YES, processing proceeds to step S322; if this determination is NO, processing returns to step S320. At this point, when the notification effect ends (when the decorative pattern stops being confirmed), each emphasis effect usually ends. However, due to a bug in the program that executes the notification effect or the effects of processing delays related to the notification effect, an emphasis effect may still be executed when the notification effect ends.

In step S322, the CPU 501 limits (forcefully terminates) the highlighting effect currently being executed. Processing then returns to step 320.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the notification effect ends (when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped), the currently executed highlight effect (see FIGS. 57 to 66) is limited (forced to end). On the other hand, while the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped after the notification effect ends and while waiting for customers thereafter, the left-hand hit notification can be executed.
Furthermore, after the right-hand play period ends (such as when a jackpot play ends or when the time-saving play state ends), there will be reserves for the second special pattern lottery which will be consumed in priority over reserves for the first special pattern lottery. However, if it is known from advance judgment information (foresight) that a jackpot will be won with the reserves for the second special pattern lottery (so-called remaining reserves), the configuration may be such that the execution of the left-hand play notification is restricted even if the start conditions for the left-hand play notification are met (since right-hand play will be performed again).

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 82 to 83. In the seventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, the movable accessory 73 and/or the effect button 16 executes effects corresponding to (linked with) the emphasis effect (see Figures 57 to 66) and the left-hit notification (see Figure 79). The following is an explanation.

FIG. 82 is an example of a flowchart of this embodiment.
82, the CPU 501 of the image/sound control unit 500 determines whether or not the left-handed hit notification is being executed. If the determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S331, and if the determination is NO, the process returns to step S330.

In step S331, the CPU 501 determines whether a predetermined emphasis effect (see Figures 57 to 66) is being executed. If the determination is YES, processing proceeds to step S333; if the determination is NO, processing proceeds to step S332. Note that the predetermined emphasis effect is at least one of the emphasis effects described in Figures 57 to 66, etc.

In step S332, the CPU 501 instructs the lamp control unit 600 via the effect control unit 400 to execute an effect corresponding to (linked with) the left-hit notification using the movable device 73 and/or the effect button 16. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83 (1), an effect is executed in which the movable device 73 flashes red in response to (linked with) the left-hit notification, and an effect is executed in which the effect button 16 flashes red. This makes the left-hit notification more noticeable.

On the other hand, in step S333, the CPU 501 restricts the movable role device 73 and/or the effect button 16 from executing an effect corresponding to (linked with) a left-hit notification, while executing an effect corresponding to (linked with) a predetermined emphasis effect that is currently being executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 83 (2), the movable role device 73 and the effect button 16 restrict the execution of an effect corresponding to (linked with) a left-hit notification, while the movable role device 73 executes an effect corresponding to (linked with) a reach-establishment emphasis effect that is currently being executed (an effect that flashes yellow while rotating), and the effect button 16 executes an effect corresponding to (linked with) a reach-establishment emphasis effect that is currently being executed (an effect that flashes yellow while vibrating).

As described above, according to this embodiment, linked effects (effects linked with other effects, etc.) using movable props 73, etc. can be executed flexibly.
In addition, the movable device 73 and/or the effect button 16 may be configured not to execute (restrict) an effect corresponding to (linked to) the left hit notification (see Figure 79) while the left hit notification is being executed, regardless of whether a specified emphasis effect is executed or not.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned linked effects may be performed not only by the movable role object 73 and the effect button 16, but also by the board lamp 10a, the frame lamp 10, etc.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 84. In the eighth embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, simultaneous extinguishing of the lights is avoided when the power supply is cut off (power failure). This will be described below.

Figure 84 is a diagram showing an example of the order in which each part turns off when power is lost to the gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 84, when power is lost, the main image display unit 70 and sub-image display unit 71 turn off first, followed by the lamps on the movable role object 73 and the performance button 16. After that, the board lamp 10a and the raku lamp 10 turn off, the sub-information display 80 turns off, and then the main information display 59 turns off.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the event of a power outage, control is performed to prevent each part from turning off simultaneously, and each part turns off in a predetermined order. Here, gaming establishments may dim the lights in their establishments to make the effects of the gaming machine 1 more impressive. In such cases, particularly when the gaming machine 1 loses power and each part of the gaming machine turns off simultaneously, the player may be surprised and experience psychological stress. Therefore, in this embodiment, control is performed to turn off each part in order in the event of a power outage, thereby reducing the psychological stress on the player.
The timing (order) in which each part turns off when the power is cut off is not limited to the above, and may be in an order according to the function of each part, etc. Similarly, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored and each part turns on, each part may turn on in a predetermined order.

Ninth Embodiment
The ninth embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 85 to 87. The ninth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the jackpot and game state are different, and a miss (special miss) that grants time reduction is added. The ninth embodiment also differs in that the background image control, etc.

Figure 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game flow in the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine 1 has a total of eight types of jackpots: five types of Type 1 jackpots and three types of Type 2 jackpots. When a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a Type 1 jackpot game is executed as the special game. When a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a small jackpot game is executed, and when the gaming ball enters the specific area 224 (see Figure 2) during the small jackpot game, a Type 2 jackpot game is executed as the special game. The eight types of jackpots are as follows:

"Type 1 10R A"
This jackpot can be won by drawing a first special symbol, and this jackpot game involves rounds 1 to 10. In each round, the first major prize opening 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 50 reaches a specified number (for example, 9 balls) or a specified time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and then closed for 2 seconds.

In this embodiment, the game states include the normal game state and low-base time-saving game state, which are played by hitting with the left hand, and the high-base time-saving game state, which is played by hitting with the right hand. As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 1 10R hit A occurs in the normal game state, the game state after the special game will return to the normal game state. If a Type 1 10R hit A occurs in the low-base time-saving game state, the game state after the special game will return to the low-base time-saving game state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the game enters the low-base time-saving game state after a Type 1 10R hit A jackpot game is 500.

In the normal game mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "normal mode"), the normal symbol variation time is 60 seconds, and the opening time of the opening/closing member 48 (see Figure 1) of the second starting port 47 per winning normal symbol lottery is 0.1 seconds.

In the low base time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "low base time-saving state"), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 59 seconds, and the opening time of the opening/closing member 48 per normal symbol lottery win is 0.11 seconds.

In the high base time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "high base time-saving state"), the normal symbol variation time is 5 seconds, and the opening/closing member 48 is open for 6 seconds per normal symbol lottery win.

Here, the difference between the normal symbol fluctuation time in the low base time-saving state and the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal state is only 1 second, and the advantage of the auxiliary game in the low base time-saving state (a game in which the normal symbol lottery is won and the opening/closing member 48 is opened, making it possible to win in the second starting hole) is almost the same as the advantage of the auxiliary game in the normal state. The normal symbol fluctuation time in the high base time-saving state is more than 50 seconds shorter than the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal state and the low base time-saving state, and the advantage of the auxiliary game in the high base time-saving state is higher than the advantage of the auxiliary game in the normal state and the low base time-saving state.
Furthermore, the difference in the opening time of the opening/closing member 48 when the normal symbol lottery is won between the low base time-saving state and the normal state is only 0.01 seconds, which also means that the advantage in the supplemental game in the low base time-saving state is almost the same as the advantage in the supplemental game in the normal state. Furthermore, the opening time in the high base time-saving state is about 5 seconds longer than the opening time in the normal state and the low base time-saving state, which also means that the advantage in the supplemental game in the high base time-saving state is higher than the advantage in the supplemental game in the normal state and the low base time-saving state.
From the above, if the normal state is the first normal state, the low base time-shortening state can be said to be the second normal state which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary play than the first normal state, and the high base time-shortening state can be said to be the time-shortening state which has an even higher advantage in terms of auxiliary play than the second normal state.

"Type 1 2R B"
This jackpot can be won with the first special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from round 1 to round 2 are played. In each round game, the first major prize opening 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then the first major prize opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 1 2R B hit occurs in normal play, the game state after the jackpot will return to normal play. If a Type 1 2R B hit occurs in low base time-saving play, the game state after the jackpot will return to normal play.

"Type 1 2R C"
This jackpot can be won with the first special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from round 1 to round 2 are played. In each round game, the first major prize opening 50 is opened until the number of prizes in the first major prize opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has passed, and then the first major prize opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 1 2R C is reached in normal play, the game state after the jackpot play will be in a high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving cycles (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after a Type 1 2R C jackpot play is reached will be 100. If a Type 1 2R C is reached in a low base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot play will again be in a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving cycles (B) when the low base time-saving state is reached after a Type 1 2R C special play is reached will be 700.

"Type 1 10R per F"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, rounds 1 to 10 are played. In each round, the first major prize opening 50 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 1 10R F occurs in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after a Type 1 10R F jackpot game is reached will be 100.

"Type 1 2R per G"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from round 1 to round 2 are played. In each round game, the first major prize opening 50 is opened until the number of prizes in the first major prize opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has passed, and then the first major prize opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 1 2R G is reached during high base time-saving mode, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving mode. The number of time-saving cycles (J) when the high base time-saving mode is reached after a Type 1 2R G jackpot game is reached is 100.

"Type 2 actual 9R per H"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from round 2 to round 10 are played after a small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and a win in specific area 224. In each round game, first large prize opening 50 is opened until the number of wins in first large prize opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has passed, and then first large prize opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 2 substantial 9R H hit occurs during high base time-saving mode, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving mode. The number of time-saving cycles (J) when the high base time-saving mode is reached after a Type 2 substantial 9R H hit game is reached is 100.

"Type 2 actual 2R per I"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from the second round to the third round are played after a small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and a prize winning in the specific area 224. In each round game, the first large prize opening 50 is opened and closed in the following opening and closing manner: first large prize opening 50 is opened until the number of prizes in first large prize opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then first large prize opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 2 actual 2R hit I occurs during a high base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after a Type 2 actual 2R hit I jackpot game is reached will be 100.

"Type 2 actual 9R win J"
This jackpot can be won with the second special symbol, and in this jackpot game, round games from round 2 to round 10 are played after a small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and a win in specific area 224. In each round game, first large prize opening 50 is opened until the number of wins in first large prize opening 50 reaches a specified number or a specified time has passed, and then first large prize opening 50 is closed for two seconds.

As shown in Figure 85, if a Type 2 effective 9R hit J occurs during a high base time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game returns to the normal state. In other words, in this embodiment, during a high base time-saving state, if a Type 1 10R hit F, a Type 1 10R hit G, a Type 2 effective 9R hit H, or a Type 2 effective 2R hit I occurs, the most advantageous high base time-saving state continues, but if a Type 2 effective 9R hit J occurs, the state returns to the normal state.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four types of special losses. Special losses are special losses that can only be selected in the first special pattern lottery. The four types of special losses are as follows:

"High base time-saving special miss a"
As shown in Figure 85, when a special miss a occurs in the normal state, the state changes to a high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the state changes to a high base time-saving state after the special miss a is 100 times.

"Low base time-saving special miss b"
As shown in Figure 85, when the special miss b occurs in the normal state, the state changes to a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state changes to a low base time-saving state after the special miss b is 700 times.

"Low base time-saving special miss c"
As shown in Figure 85, when a special miss c occurs in the normal state, the state changes to a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state changes to a low base time-saving state after a special miss c occurs is 500 times.

"Low base time-saving special miss d"
As shown in Figure 85, when a special miss d occurs in the normal state, the state changes to a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state changes to a low base time-saving state after a special miss d is 300 times.

Missions other than the four types of special misses mentioned above are normal misses. Stopping on a normal miss symbol does not itself trigger a change in game state. However, as shown in Figure 85, if the variable display stopping on a normal miss symbol continues for 900 times during a game state that is not in a high base time-saving state, the game state will change to a high base time-saving state after the 900th symbol stops. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after 900 normal misses is reached will be 100.

As mentioned above, the low base time-saving state offers a higher advantage in terms of supplemental play than the normal state. However, as shown in Figure 85, in the low base time-saving state, stopping the special symbol on any symbol does not result in a high base time-saving state. In contrast, in the normal state, if the special symbol stops on the first-type 2R win C symbol, the high base time-saving state is entered after the jackpot play ends, and if the special symbol stops on the high base time-saving activation special miss a symbol, the high base time-saving state is entered immediately. Therefore, in terms of the ease of entering the high base time-saving state, the normal state offers a higher advantage than the low base time-saving state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the player hopes to remain in the normal state during the normal state and obtain more opportunities to advance to the high base time-saving state by hitting the first-type 2R win C symbol or the high base time-saving activation special miss a symbol. Additionally, while in the low base time-saving state, the player will want to either hit the Type 1 2R B symbol as quickly as possible, or resolve the fluctuation in the low base time-saving count (B) and move on to the normal state.

Here, the arcade where gaming machine 1 is installed performs the daily operation of shutting off the power to gaming machine 1 before closing time and then powering it back on before opening the next day. When the power to gaming machine 1 is shut off (for example, before closing time), the main control unit 100 backs up information indicating the game status, etc., stored in ROM 102. When the power to gaming machine 1 is turned back on (for example, before opening the next day), the main control unit 100 restores the game status, etc., to the time of power shut off (the previous day), and sends to the presentation control unit 400 a power restoration command (restore notification command) and a game status command (game status notification command) indicating the game status in which power was restored.

If the game state was normal when the power was cut off (power outage) before closing the previous day, the power will be restored in normal state immediately after the power is turned on the next day. If the game state was low base time-saving state when the power was cut off (power out) before closing the previous day, the power will be restored in low base time-saving state immediately after the power is turned on the next day. However, if the RAM is cleared by a store employee or other person when the power is turned on, the power will be restored in normal state.

When power is restored in normal mode, the main control unit 100 sends a power restoration command and a game status command corresponding to the normal mode to the presentation control unit 400. When power is restored in low base time-saving mode, the main control unit 100 sends a game status command corresponding to the low base time-saving mode to the presentation control unit 400.

Next, the control of the background image of the notification effect (variable effect) that is executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on will be described.
Immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control unit 400 displays the background image of an evening background (evening background) which is the background of the normal state (or the background image of a daytime background which is the background of the low base time-saving state) on the main image display unit 70 as a background image (background image for notification performance) common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored in the normal state or in the low base time-saving state. Note that the background of the high base time-saving state is a night background.

Figure 86 is a diagram illustrating an example of the control of the background image of the notification effect (variable effect) that begins after the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

Figure 86 (1) explains the case where power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in normal mode. As shown in Figure 86 (1), at t1, when the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t2, a power restoration command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating that the normal mode is in effect. Next, at t3, a game status command indicating the normal mode is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 (by instructing the image and audio control unit 500) displays an evening background (the original background) as the background image. Next, at t4, a notification effect (variable effect) is initiated, and a game status command indicating the normal mode is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t5, the notification effect ends, and a game status command indicating the normal mode is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t6, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t7, the notification effect ends, the game status switches from the normal state to the low base time-shortening state, and a game status command indicating the low base time-shortening state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 switches the background image to a daylight background (a background different from the original background). Next, at t8, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the low base time-shortening state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t9, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the low base time-shortening state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t10, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the low base time-shortening state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400.

Figure 86 (2) explains the case where power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in a low base time-saving state. As shown in Figure 86 (2), at t1, when the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t2, a power restoration command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating that the gaming machine is in a low base time-saving state. Next, at t3, a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 (instructs the image and audio control unit 500) displays an evening background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t4, a notification effect (variable effect) is started, and a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400, but the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of an evening background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t5, the notification effect ends, and the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating a low base time-shortening state to the presentation control unit 400, but the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) displaying an evening background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t6, the notification effect starts, and the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating a low base time-shortening state to the presentation control unit 400, but the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) displaying an evening background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. In this way, the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) displaying an evening background (a background different from the original background) as the background image, even if a game status command indicating a low base time-shortening state is sent, from the time the power is restored until the notification effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (30 times). Then, at t9, the 30th notification effect ends, and the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state to the presentation control unit 400, causing the presentation control unit 400 to switch the background image to a daytime background (the original background). Next, at t10, the notification effect begins, the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 continues to display the daytime background (the original background).

As described above (see Figure 86 (1)), when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on is normal, the presentation control unit 400 selects the evening background, which is the original background for the normal state, and displays the background image of the evening background on the main image display unit 70. Thereafter, the presentation control unit 400 maintains the display of the evening background image until it receives a gaming state command for the low base time-shortened state, and when it receives a gaming state command for the low base time-shortened state, it changes the background to the daytime background (original background) in accordance with the gaming state command.

As described above (see FIG. 86 (2)), when the game state immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on is the low base time-saving state, the presentation control unit 400 selects an evening background (a background different from the original background), which is the same background as the normal state, and displays the background image of the evening background on the main image display unit 70. Thereafter, the presentation control unit 400 sets 30 fluctuations of the special symbol (30 executions of the notification effect) as the predetermined condition for returning to the original background. Until 30 fluctuations of the special symbol are completed, even if a game state command for the low base time-saving state is received while the same background image as the normal state is being displayed, the presentation control unit 400 ignores the game state command for the background image display and maintains the display of the evening background image. Once 30 fluctuations of the special symbol are completed and the predetermined condition is met, the background is returned to the original one. When a game state command for the normal state is received, the presentation control unit 400 displays the background image of the evening background, which is the background corresponding to the normal state. When a game state command for the low base time-saving state is received, the presentation control unit 400 displays the background image of the daylight background, which is the background corresponding to the low base time-saving state.

Figure 87 is a diagram illustrating another example of the control of the background image of the notification effect (variable effect) that begins after the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

Figure 87 (1) explains the case where power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in a normal state. As shown in Figure 87 (2), at t1, when the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t2, a power restoration command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating a normal state. Next, at t3, a game status command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 (instructs the image and audio control unit 500) displays a daytime background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t4, a notification presentation (variable presentation) is started, and a game status command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400, but the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) displaying a daytime background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t5, the notification effect ends, and the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating the normal state to the presentation control unit 400. However, the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of a daytime background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. Next, at t6, the notification effect begins, and the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating the normal state to the presentation control unit 400. However, the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of a daytime background (a background different from the original background) as the background image. In this way, even if a game status command indicating the normal state is sent, the presentation control unit 400 continues (maintains) the display of a daytime background (a background different from the original background) as the background image from the time the power is restored until the 30th notification effect is executed. Then, at t9, the 30th notification effect ends, and the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating the normal state to the presentation control unit 400. The presentation control unit 400 switches the background image to an evening background (the original background). Next, at t10, the notification effect begins, the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating the normal state to the effect control unit 400, and the effect control unit 400 continues to display the daytime background (the original background).

Figure 87 (2) explains the case where power is restored when the gaming machine 1 is in a low base time-saving state. As shown in Figure 87 (2), at t1, when the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t2, a power restoration command is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. This power restoration command includes information indicating that the gaming machine is in a low base time-saving state. Next, at t3, a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 (by instructing the image and audio control unit 500) displays a daytime background (the original background) as the background image. Next, at t4, a notification effect (variable effect) is initiated, and a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t5, the notification effect ends, and a game status command indicating a low base time-saving state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t6, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the low base time-shortening state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t7, the notification effect ends, the game status switches from the low base time-shortening state to the normal state, the main control unit 100 sends a game status command indicating the normal state to the presentation control unit 400, and the presentation control unit 400 switches the background image to an evening background (the original background). Next, at t8, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t9, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400. Next, at t10, the notification effect begins, and a game status command indicating the normal state is sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 400.

As described above (see FIG. 87 (1)), when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on is the normal state, the presentation control unit 400 selects a daytime background, which is the same background as the low-base time-saving state, and displays the background image of the daytime background on the main image display unit 70. The presentation control unit 400 then sets the predetermined condition for returning to the original background when the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (30 times) (the notification effect is executed 30 times). Until the 30 changes of the special symbol are complete, even if a gaming state designation command for the normal state is received while the background image identical to the low-base time-saving state is being displayed, the presentation control unit 400 ignores the gaming state designation command and maintains the display of the daytime background image. Once the 30 changes of the special symbol are complete and the predetermined condition is met, the background is returned to the original one. When a gaming state designation command for the low-base time-saving state is received, the presentation control unit 400 displays the background image of the daytime background, which is the background corresponding to the low-base time-saving state. When a gaming state designation command for the normal state is received, the presentation control unit 400 displays the background image of the evening background, which is the background corresponding to the normal state.

Furthermore, as described above (see Figure 87 (2)), when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on is the low base time-shortened state, the presentation control unit 400 selects the daytime background, which is the original background for the low base time-shortened state, and displays the background image of the daytime background on the main image display unit 70. Thereafter, the presentation control unit 400 maintains the display of the background image of the daytime background until it receives a gaming state designation command for the normal state, and when it receives a gaming state designation command for the normal state, it changes the background to an evening background in accordance with that gaming state designation command.

As described above, according to this embodiment, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, regardless of whether the gaming machine 1 is powered on in the normal state or the low base time-shortening state, the background image of the evening background (evening background) which is the background of the normal state (or the background image of the daytime background which is the background of the low base time-shortening state) is displayed on the main image display unit 70 as a background image (background image for the notification effect) common to the normal state and the low base time-shortening state. As a result, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to tell whether the state is the normal state or the low base time-shortening state (see FIG. 85), thereby improving the entertainment value of the game.
In addition, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is turned on, an image of a background (for example, a star background) different from either the evening background which is the original background of the normal state or the daytime background which is the original background of the low base time-saving state may be displayed on the main image display unit 70 as a presentation image common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state.

Tenth Embodiment
The tenth embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 88. In the tenth embodiment, in the gaming machine 1 according to each embodiment, when the notification effect (variable effect) starts from the customer waiting state, a unique effect is performed on the decorative pattern. This will be described below.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 88 (1), while waiting for customers, the decorative number 701 remains stationary (stopped), while the character 702 performs a dramatic action (for example, moving its arms). Note that the character 702 is displayed behind (at the back of) the number 701.

When the notification effect begins, as shown in Figure 88 (2), the decorative pattern number 701 performs a swinging motion, and the character 702 continues (maintains) its effect motion.

According to this embodiment, while waiting for customers, the impression of the place being deserted can be avoided by having the character 702 perform a special action, while the number 701 in front of the character 702 is displayed as a still image, making it clear that the place is waiting for customers and no notification action is being performed.
When the notification effect starts, the number 701 starts to swing, clearly indicating that the notification effect has started, while the character 702 continues (maintains) its performance motion as is, giving the impression that the notification effect has started smoothly and without interruption from waiting for customers.

Eleventh Embodiment
An eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In the eleventh embodiment, various examples related to the configurations (features) of the above-described embodiments will be described below.

Figure 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of an identification image 380 that identifies a presentation mode. A presentation mode is a presentation mode (presentation stage) executed in different game states or the same game state. For example, a unique background image is displayed for each presentation mode. As shown in Figure 89 (1), the identification image 380 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen 70 to indicate the current presentation mode (sometimes simply referred to as "mode" or "stage"). Also, as shown in Figures 89 (2) and (3), the identification image 380 includes a designation section 382 that indicates the presentation mode name and an emphasis section 383 that emphasizes the designation section 382 by decoration, etc. The display manner of the emphasis section 383 can be different between a first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage in normal game state) and a second presentation mode (e.g., the stage in time-saving game state, the second stage in normal game state, etc.). In addition, the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the mode of their sound output (notification mode) can be the same between the first and second presentation modes.

Furthermore, the identification image 380 described using FIG. 89 may be configured to include a specifying section 382 indicating the zone name (the name of the zone effect) and an emphasizing section 383 that emphasizes the specifying section 382 by decorating it, etc. Furthermore, the identification image 380 may be the right-hit notification image 370 ( FIG. 78 ) and may be configured to include a specifying section 382 that is a text image "Right Hit" and an emphasizing section 383 that emphasizes the specifying section 382 by decorating it, etc. (e.g., an arrow image, other decorative image, etc.) Furthermore, the identification image 380 may be the left-hit notification image 370 ( FIG. 79 ) and may be configured to include a specifying section 382 that is a text image "Left Hit" and an emphasizing section 383 that emphasizes the specifying section 382 by decorating it, etc. (e.g., an arrow image, other decorative image, etc.)
Furthermore, it is possible to make the display mode of the highlighting portion 383 of the first identification image 380 (e.g., an identification image indicating the presentation mode name) different between the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage of the normal game mode or the time-saving game mode) and the second presentation mode (e.g., the second stage of the normal game mode or the time-saving game mode), and it is also possible to make the display mode of the highlighting portion 383 of the second identification image 380 (e.g., the right-hit notification image 370) different.

It is also possible to make the presentation style (character movements, lighting effects, etc.) of the temporary stop emphasis presentation (Fig. 32) different between the first mode (first stage in normal play mode) and the second mode (stage in time-saving play mode, second stage in normal play mode, etc.). It is also possible to make the display style of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and its sound output style (notification style) the same between the first mode and the second mode. It is also possible to make the display style of right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, etc. (Figs. 78, 79) the same between the first mode and the second mode and its sound output style (notification style).

It is also possible to vary the presentation style (character movements, lighting effects, etc.) of the reach achievement highlighting effect (Figure 43) between the first mode (first stage in normal game mode) and the second mode (stage in time-limited game mode, second stage in normal game mode, etc.). It is also possible to make the display style of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and its sound output style (alert style) the same between the first mode and the second mode. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a unique reach achievement highlighting effect corresponding to the first mode, and execute a unique reach achievement highlighting effect corresponding to the second mode (this feature is not limited to reach achievement highlighting effects and may be applied to other highlighting effects as well).

In addition, it is possible to use different highlighting effects (e.g., Figures 40 (4) (7), 51 (2) (5)) that emphasize the final intermediate decorative symbol that temporarily stops after a reach is achieved between the first mode (first stage of normal game mode) and the second mode (stage of time-saving game mode, second stage of normal game mode, etc.). In addition, it is possible to use the same display mode and sound output mode (alert mode) of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, in the notification effect for a reach miss (Figs. 38-40), it is possible to use different highlighting effects (Fig. 40 (4)) that highlight the central decorative symbol that temporarily stops at the end of a reach win notification effect (Figs. 38-40) between the first mode (first stage in normal game mode) and the second mode (stage in time-limited game mode, second stage in normal game mode, etc.). In addition, it is possible to use the same display mode and sound output mode (notification mode) of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, in certain modes (such as the first stage in normal game mode), it is possible to make the emphasis mode (character movement, lighting effects, etc.) different between the temporary stop emphasis effect (Fig. 32) of the first decorative symbol (e.g., the "6" symbol; Figs. 22 and 23) and the temporary stop emphasis effect of the second effect symbol (e.g., the "7" symbol).

In addition, in a specific mode (for example, the first stage in normal game mode), it is possible to differentiate the emphasis mode (character movement, light-emitting effects, etc.; Figure 43) between the emphasis mode (for example, a reach-achi emphasis mode) for a specific first decorative symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol of a "6" symbol) and the emphasis mode (for example, a reach-achi emphasis mode) for a predetermined first decorative symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol of a "7" symbol). In addition, in a specific mode, it is possible to make the display mode and sound output mode (alert mode) of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 the same when the first decorative symbol is displayed and when the second decorative symbol is displayed.

In addition, in a specific mode (for example, the first stage in normal game mode), it is possible to differentiate the emphasis mode (character movement, light-emitting effects, etc.; Figure 43) between the temporary stop emphasis effect of the first decorative symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol) and the temporary stop emphasis effect of the second decorative symbol (for example, the middle decorative symbol). In addition, in a specific mode, it is possible to make the display mode and sound output mode (alert mode) of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 the same when the first decorative symbol is displayed and when the second decorative symbol is displayed.

Furthermore, the decorative symbols displayed in specific areas (such as the left decorative symbol display area and the center symbol display area) include a first effect symbol (for example, a left decorative symbol of a "6") and a second effect symbol (for example, a left decorative symbol of a "7"), and in a specific mode (for example, the first stage of normal play), it is possible to make the emphasis mode (character movement, light-emitting effects, etc.; Figures 44 and 45) different between the effect emphasizing the formation of a double-digit first decorative symbol and the effect emphasizing the formation of a double-digit second decorative symbol. Furthermore, in a specific mode, it is possible to make the display mode and sound output mode (alert mode) of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 the same when the first decorative symbol is displayed and when the second decorative symbol is displayed.

It is also possible to vary the emphasis mode (e.g., button image movement, light-emitting effects before or after the button image is displayed, etc.) of the button image emphasis mode (Figure 67, etc.) before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., reach establishment effect, SP reach development effect, pseudo-consecutive effect, etc.) in the notification effect (variable effect). It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and their sound output mode (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make the display mode of the right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371 (Figures 78, 79) and their sound output mode (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

In addition, it is possible to differ the emphasis mode (e.g., the operation of the button image (including the speed at which the button image is repeatedly pressed), the light-emitting effect, etc.) of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., Figure 67) between the first mode (e.g., during normal game play) and the second mode (e.g., during time-saving game play). Also, it is possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and their sound output mode (alert mode) the same between the first mode and the second mode. Furthermore, it is possible to make the display mode of the right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371 (Figures 78, 79) and their sound output mode (alert mode) the same between the first mode and the second mode.

It is also possible to differentiate the emphasis modes (e.g., button image movement, light-emitting effects, etc.; Figs. 67-69, etc.) of the button image emphasis modes between the first operation effect displaying a button image (Fig. 67, etc.) and the second operation effect. It is also possible to make the display modes of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and their audio output modes (alert modes) the same when the first operation effect (e.g., a white button image that does not indicate a high probability of a jackpot, a single-press operation (Fig. 67), etc.) is being executed and when the second operation effect (e.g., a red button image that indicates a high probability of a jackpot, a rapid-press operation or a long-press operation (Figs. 68, 69), etc.) is being executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to make the display modes of the right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371 (Figs. 78, 79) and their audio output modes (alert modes) the same when the first operation effect is being executed and when the second operation effect is being executed.

In addition, it is possible to make the light-emitting effects and protruding actions (and their execution times) of the button highlighting effects (e.g., Figure 67) different between the first vibration effect (e.g., short-time vibration) and the second vibration effect (e.g., long-time vibration). In addition, it is possible to make the display mode and sound output mode (alert mode) of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 the same when the first vibration effect is being executed and when the second vibration effect is being executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute highlighting effects (for example, highlighting effects when a double number is formed, highlighting effects suggesting a confirmed symbol, color highlighting (rainbow highlighting) to notify of a jackpot, etc.) that can be executed during the execution of effects that suggest or notify of a jackpot (such as a temporary stop of a double number), and it is possible to differ the manner in which the highlighting effects are executed between the first mode (for example, the stage in normal play mode) and the second mode (for example, the stage in time-saving play mode). In addition, it is possible to make the display manner of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the manner in which they output sound (notification manner) the same between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, images of effects that encourage anticipation of a jackpot (for example, cut-in notices, zone effects, etc.; Figures 38 (5), 50, etc.) can be enhanced with effects (for example, light-emitting effects, action effects, etc.), and may be configured to have a first mode (for example, white text) and a second mode (for example, red text) that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first mode.
The mode of the emphasis effect can be different between the first mode and the second mode of the image of the effect that anticipates a big win. Also, the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 and the mode of their sound output (alert mode) can be the same when the image of the effect that anticipates a big win is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode.

It is also possible to make the appearance of the movable role highlighting effect (e.g., Figure 83) different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (for example, a reach completion effect, an SP reach development effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.). It is also possible to make the display appearance of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the appearance of their sound output (notification appearance) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

In addition, highlighting effects (e.g., light-emitting effects, action effects, etc.) can be implemented in effect images that anticipate a jackpot (e.g., cut-in announcements, zone effects, changes in the reserved icon; Figures 25, 38 (5), 50, etc.), and there are first effect images (e.g., cut-in announcements or zone effects that display text) and second effect images (e.g., changes in the reserved icon). The first effect image may have a first mode (white text mode) and a second mode (red text mode), and the second effect image may have a third mode (white icon) and a fourth mode (red icon). It is possible to make the mode of highlighting different between the second mode (red text) of the first effect image and the fourth mode (red icon) of the second effect image. Furthermore, the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the mode of its sound output (notification mode) can be the same when the first effect image of the second mode is displayed and when the second effect image of the fourth mode is displayed.

It is also possible to vary the time (for example, the button image rapid-fire action or flashing time; Fig. 68, etc.) for the change in the mode of the button image emphasis effect (Figs. 67-69) before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (for example, a reach establishment effect, an SP reach development effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.). It is also possible to make the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and their sound output mode (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect. Furthermore, it is also possible to make the display mode of the right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371 (Figs. 78, 79) and their sound output mode (notification mode) the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

It is also possible to differentiate the time it takes for the button image highlighting effect (Figures 67 to 69) to change (for example, the time it takes for the button image to be repeatedly pressed or flashing; Figure 68, etc.) from the time it takes for the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 (or the right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371) to be displayed or for the notification time provided by the sound output.

In addition, it is possible to vary the time it takes for the button image emphasis effects (Figs. 67-69) to change appearance (for example, the time it takes for the button image to be pressed repeatedly or to flash; Fig. 68, etc.) between the first emphasis effects (for example, a white button image that does not indicate a high probability of a jackpot, the effect in the case of a single press (Fig. 67)) and the second emphasis effects (for example, a red button image that indicates a high probability of a jackpot, the effect in the case of a rapid press or long press (Figs. 68, 69)). Furthermore, it is possible to use the same display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 (or right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371) and notification time by sound output when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.

It is also possible to set different times for the button image highlighting effect to change between the first mode (e.g., during normal game play) and the second mode (e.g., during time-saving game play) (e.g., the duration of the button image's rapid tapping or flashing; see FIG. 68, etc.). It is also possible to set the same display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the duration of the sound output notification between the first mode and the second mode.

It is also possible to execute an emphasis effect (e.g., an arrow display, an arrow movement display, a light-emitting effect display, etc.) that emphasizes the right-hit notification image 370 and an emphasis effect (e.g., an arrow display, an arrow movement display, a light-emitting effect display, etc.) that emphasizes the left-hit notification image 371, and to vary the execution time of the emphasis effect between the right-hit notification image 370 and the left-hit notification image 371. It is also possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output the same when the right-hit notification image 370 and the left-hit notification image 371 are displayed.

In addition, it is possible to execute highlighting effects (for example, highlighting effects when a double number is formed, highlighting effects suggesting that a pattern has been confirmed, color highlighting (rainbow highlighting) for notifying a jackpot, etc.) that can be executed during the execution of effects that suggest or notify a jackpot (for example, a temporary stop of a double number, etc.), and it is possible to make the execution time of the highlighting effects different between the first mode (for example, during normal play) and the second mode (for example, during time-saving play). In addition, it is possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output the same between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, a specified emphasis effect (for example, a light-emitting effect of the effect button emphasis effect) can be executed when a vibration effect of the effect button emphasis effect is being executed before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (for example, a reach completion effect, an SP reach development selection, a pseudo-consecutive effect, etc.), and the execution time of this specified emphasis effect can be made different. In addition, the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output can be made the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

In addition, a specified emphasis effect (for example, a light-emitting effect for the effect button emphasis effect) can be executed when a vibration effect for the effect button emphasis effect is being executed, and it is possible to differentiate the execution time of the specified emphasis effect from the display time of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 or the notification time by sound output.

In addition, a specified emphasis effect (for example, a light-emitting effect for the effect button emphasis effect) can be executed when the vibration effect for the effect button emphasis effect is being executed, and the execution time of the specified emphasis effect can be made different between the first mode (for example, during normal play) and the second mode (for example, during time-saving play). In addition, the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output can be made the same between the first mode and the second mode.

It is also possible to make the execution time (e.g., operation time, light emission time, etc.) of the movable role highlighting effect (83, etc.) different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (e.g., reach completion effect, SP reach development selection, pseudo consecutive effect, etc.). It is also possible to make the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 (or right-hit notification image 370/left-hit notification image 371) and the notification time by sound output the same before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect.

It is also possible to set the execution time of the movable character highlighting effect to be different from the time when the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is displayed or the sound is output.

In addition, it is possible to make the execution time of the emphasis effect (e.g., arrow display, arrow action display, light-emitting effect, etc.) that emphasizes the left-hit notification image 371 different from the notification time by the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 or the sound output.
In addition, it is possible to make the execution time of the emphasis effect (e.g., arrow display, arrow action display, light-emitting effect, etc.) that emphasizes the right-hit notification image 370 different from the notification time by the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 or the sound output.

It is also possible to execute a first emphasis effect (e.g., a double-digit confirmation emphasis effect, a symbol confirmation suggestion emphasis effect, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis), etc.) that emphasizes an effect suggesting or notifying a jackpot (e.g., a double-digit temporary stop, etc.), and it is also possible to execute a specific vibration effect (e.g., a specific vibration effect of a button emphasis effect) while an effect suggesting or notifying a jackpot (e.g., a double-digit temporary stop, etc.) is being executed. It is also possible to execute a second emphasis effect (e.g., an emphasis effect in which a button emphasis effect emits rainbow colors, etc.) while a specific vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to vary the execution time of the first emphasis effect, the execution time of the second emphasis effect, and the display time of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification time by sound output.

Furthermore, after the start of a special effect (for example, a reach completion effect, an SP development effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, etc.), it is possible to display a predetermined emphasis effect image (Figs. 57 to 66), and it is possible to control this predetermined emphasis effect image so that it covers the decorative pattern but not the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the lighting effects of highlighting effects that emphasize the effect patterns (for example, temporary stop highlighting effects) so that they are applied to the decorative patterns and not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the lighting effect used to highlight the occurrence of double numbers so that it applies to the decorative symbols but not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, the lighting effects for highlighting button images (such as Figure 67 (1)) that can be displayed before the button images are displayed can be controlled so that they affect the decorative pattern but not the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the lighting effect (such as Figure 68 (3-1)) of the button image highlighting effect in response to the operation of the effect button 16 so that it applies to the decorative pattern but not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, it is possible to control the lighting effect of the pseudo consecutive highlighting performance (Figure 41, etc.) so that it applies to the decorative pattern but not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

It is also possible to implement highlighting effects (such as highlighting the formation of double numbers, highlighting effects suggesting that a jackpot has been hit, highlighting effects indicating that a pattern has been confirmed, highlighting colors indicating a jackpot (rainbow highlighting), etc.) that highlight effects suggesting or notifying that a jackpot has been hit (such as a temporary stop of double numbers), and it is possible to control the images of these highlighting effects (such as light-emitting effects) so that they are applied to the decorative patterns but not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

It is also possible to implement an emphasis effect (for example, an arrow display, an arrow movement display, a light-emitting effect, etc.) that emphasizes the right-hit notification image 370 (or the left-hit notification image 371), and it is possible to control the image of this emphasis effect (light-emitting effect, etc.) so that it applies to the decorative pattern but not to the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361.

In addition, in the notification effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an SP reach effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the predetermined effect, a losing decorative pattern can be displayed, followed by a special image (for example, an eye-catching image that is displayed on the entire screen (or part of the screen) to draw the eye and change the mood). While this special image is displayed, certain emphasis effects that emphasize the decorative pattern (for example, temporary stop emphasis effects, swing emphasis effects, etc.) are restricted, but notifications can be executed by displaying the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and outputting sound.

Furthermore, in certain variable effects (for example, changes due to the consumption of reserved second special symbol lottery results while the results are being displayed) in the second mode (for example, during time-saving gameplay), which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode (for example, during normal gameplay), the variable effects of the decorative symbols are restricted, and predetermined emphasis effects (for example, change start emphasis effects, temporary stop emphasis effects, etc.) are restricted, but the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and notifications via sound output can still be implemented.

In addition, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect can be executed during the execution of a specific movable device emphasis effect that suggests or notifies the player of a jackpot. When the jackpot notification color emphasis effect is being executed (displayed), the display of easily visible decorative patterns is restricted, but the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 can still be displayed and notifications can be made through sound output.

In addition, when the special symbol stops fluctuating, it is possible to limit the decorative symbol emphasis effects (for example, temporary stop emphasis effects, swing emphasis effects, etc.) and the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification by sound output in the notification effects.

In addition, when the special symbol stops fluctuating, it is possible to limit the decorative symbol emphasis effect (for example, temporary stop emphasis effect, swing emphasis effect, etc.) in the notification effect without limiting the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 or notification by sound output.

In addition, when a specific emphasis effect (for example, jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow color emphasis), etc.) is being executed, if the cross key 18 is operated, it is possible to display the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 or issue a notification through sound output, and if the rear key 170 is operated, it is possible to not execute at least some of the above notifications.

In addition, it is possible to vary the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification by sound output when waiting for customers and when a specified emphasis effect is being executed in the notification effect (for example, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow color emphasis) effect).

Furthermore, if the cross key 18 is operated while a specified emphasis effect (Figures 57 to 66) is being executed, it is possible to display the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and issue a notification through audio output. On the other hand, while waiting for customers, it is possible to vary the manner in which the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is displayed and the notification through audio output depending on whether the cross key 18 is operated or the back key 170 is operated.

In addition, certain highlighting effects (Figures 57 to 66) reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern but do not reduce the visibility of the volume gauge 360, etc., and if the cross key 18 is operated while the volume gauge 360, etc. is displayed, an alarm sound is output and the performance effect (volume/light intensity) can be adjusted. In addition, if the back key 170 is operated while the volume gauge 360, etc. is displayed, the performance effect (volume/light intensity) can be adjusted without outputting an alarm sound.

In addition, it is possible to make the sound effects of specified emphasis effects (Figures 57 to 66) different between the first and second modes, and it is possible to make the notification sounds output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same between the first and second modes.

In addition, while the display mode of the temporary stop emphasis effect can be different for the first decorative pattern (e.g., left decorative pattern) and the second decorative pattern (e.g., right decorative pattern), it is possible to make the sound effects of the temporary stop emphasis effect the same. Furthermore, when the first decorative pattern temporarily stops and when the second decorative pattern temporarily stops, it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of a specific notification (e.g., a right hit notification, a left hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

Furthermore, the sound effect for the temporary stop emphasis performance is the same for the first decorative symbol (for example, the decorative "1" symbol) and the second decorative symbol (for example, the decorative "2" symbol), but it is possible to make the emphasis sound different for the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol (for example, the decorative "7" symbol). On the other hand, when the first, second, or third decorative symbol stops, it is possible to make the notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while the display format differs (e.g., character movements, lighting effects, etc.) between the first temporary stop emphasis effect of the first decorative pattern (e.g., left and right decorative patterns) and the second temporary stop emphasis effect of the second decorative pattern (e.g., center decorative pattern), it is possible to use the same sound effects. Furthermore, it is possible to use the same notification sound output during specific notifications (e.g., right hit notification, left hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) during the execution of the first temporary stop emphasis effect and the second temporary stop emphasis effect.

It is also possible to use different presentation styles for reach-enhancing highlighting effects that encourage the player to anticipate a temporary stop of the first decorative symbol (e.g., the decorative symbol "4") and reach-enhancing highlighting effects that encourage the player to anticipate a temporary stop of the second decorative symbol (e.g., the decorative symbol "7"). Furthermore, it is possible to use the same notification sound output when a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) is made during the execution of a reach-enhancing highlighting effect that encourages the player to anticipate a temporary stop of the first decorative symbol and during the execution of a reach-enhancing highlighting effect that encourages the player to anticipate a temporary stop of the second decorative symbol.

It is also possible to use different presentation styles for the reach-achi emphasizing effect when a reach is achieved with the first decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") and the reach-achi emphasizing effect when a reach is achieved with the second decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "7"). It is also possible to use the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) when a reach is achieved with the first decorative symbol and when a reach is achieved with the second decorative symbol.

It is also possible to use different sound effects for the reach success highlighting effect when executing the first reach success highlighting effect (for example, a reach success highlighting effect that includes a blue light-emitting effect) and when executing the second reach success highlighting effect (for example, a reach success highlighting effect that includes a red light-emitting effect). It is also possible to use the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) when executing the first reach success highlighting effect and the second reach success highlighting effect.

In addition, it is possible to simultaneously (or alternately) execute a first jackpot stop prompt emphasis effect that emphasizes a center decorative pattern that is a double number (for example, a center decorative pattern that indicates a jackpot) and a second jackpot stop prompt emphasis effect that emphasizes a center decorative pattern that is not a double number (for example, a center decorative pattern that indicates a miss), and it is possible to use different sound effects for the first jackpot stop prompt emphasis effect and the second jackpot stop prompt emphasis effect. Furthermore, it is possible to use the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.) when the first jackpot stop prompt emphasis effect and the second jackpot stop prompt emphasis effect are being executed.

It is also possible to execute a first doublet highlighting effect in which a first decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") produces a doublet, and a second doublet highlighting effect in which a second decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "7") produces a doublet, and it is possible to use different sound effects for the first doublet highlighting effect and the second doublet highlighting effect. It is also possible to use the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.) when the first doublet highlighting effect and the second doublet highlighting effect are being performed.

In addition, while it is possible to use different sound effects to emphasize the formation of double numbers between the first and second modes, it is possible to use the same notification sounds output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.).

In addition, it is possible to use different presentation styles for reach-establishment emphasis effects and SP development emphasis effects, and it is possible to use the same notification sound output when certain notifications (for example, right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.) when reach-establishment emphasis effects are being executed and when SP development emphasis effects are being executed.

In addition, while the manner in which the movable role emphasis effect is performed differs when it is performed before a specific effect (for example, a reach completion effect, an SP development effect, etc.) and when it is performed after a specific effect, it is possible to make the notification sounds output for specific notifications (for example, a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same. In each embodiment, the execution time of the sound output may also be taken into consideration when deciding whether or not the sound output of sound effects, notification sounds, etc. is the same.

In addition, while it is possible to have different sound effects for the movable device highlighting effect (and the jackpot notification color highlighting (rainbow highlighting) effect displayed behind the movable device 73 that has descended to the center of the screen 70, etc.) between the first and second modes, it is possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.).

In addition, the predetermined emphasis effects (e.g., reach-achi effect emphasis effects, chance eye effect emphasis effects, etc.) that emphasize the expected effects (e.g., reach-achi effect effect, chance eye effect, etc.) that raise the expectation of a jackpot have a first mode (e.g., a red light-emitting effect mode) and a second mode (e.g., a gold light-emitting effect mode), and it is possible to make the sound effects of the predetermined emphasis effects different between the first mode and the second mode. Furthermore, it is possible to make the notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the first mode and when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the second mode.

In addition, in the hold change presentation, it is possible to make the sound effect of the hold change emphasis presentation different when the hold icon (including the hold icon on stage ST0; Figures 24, 25, etc.) is displayed in a first mode (e.g., blue) and when it is displayed in a second mode (e.g., red), while it is possible to make the notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to have different sound effects for the button image highlighting effects (e.g., Figure 67) between the first and second modes, it is also possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.). This sound effect may be, for example, a sound effect output when the light-emitting effect 350 is displayed immediately before the button image 351 is displayed (e.g., a "beep" or "ping"), or a sound effect output while the button image 351 is displayed.

In addition, in the button image emphasis effect (Figure 67, etc.), it is possible to use different sound effects for the first mode (e.g., a mode in which the light-emitting effect 350 is displayed immediately before the button image 351 is displayed) and the second mode (e.g., a mode in which the button image 351 is gradually and clearly displayed after the light-emitting effect 350 is displayed), while it is also possible to use the same notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.). Note that the sound effects for the button image emphasis effect may be different within the same effect mode, or may be different for each effect mode.

In addition, while it is possible to use different sound effects for the first button image emphasis effect (for example, a button image emphasis effect for a single press operation response effect; Fig. 67) and the second button image emphasis effect (for example, a button image emphasis effect for a long press operation response effect; Fig. 69), it is also possible to use the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.). Note that the way the button image disappears may differ depending on the type of operation response effect (for example, a single press, repeated presses, or a long press), and the behavior of the button image (the behavior of the button image for the button image emphasis effect) may also differ.

In addition, while it is possible to have different sound effects for button image emphasis effects before and after the execution of special effects (for example, reach completion effects, SP development effects, pseudo consecutive effects, etc.), it is possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, notifications displaying a volume gauge, etc.).

In addition, as operation response effects (e.g., FIG. 67 (4) etc.) that can be executed in response to operation of the effect button 16 during the valid operation period, it is possible to execute predetermined operation response effects (e.g., a cut-in preview effect, etc.; FIG. 38 (5) etc.), and it is also possible to execute predetermined emphasis effects that emphasize predetermined operation response effects (e.g., a cut-in emphasis effect, etc.; FIG. 38 (5) etc.). And while it is possible to have different sound effects for the first predetermined emphasis effect and the second predetermined emphasis effect, it is possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) when the first predetermined emphasis effect is executed and when the second predetermined emphasis effect is executed.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of sound effects for specified emphasis effects (Figures 57 to 66) different between the first and second modes, it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of notification sounds output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of the sound effect of the emphasis effect different between the first emphasis effect (e.g., reach establishment emphasis effect, SP development effect, pseudo consecutive effect, etc.) that is executed before the execution of a special effect and the first emphasis effect that is executed after the execution of a special effect, it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of the notification sound that is output when a specific notification (e.g., right hit notification, left hit notification, notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.

In addition, while it is possible to vary the output time (duration of sound) of sound effects for specified emphasis effects that emphasize decorative patterns (double numbers) that suggest or notify a jackpot (for example, double number confirmation emphasis effects, pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effects, jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow color emphasis) effects, etc.) between the first and second modes, it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of notification sounds that are output when certain notifications are made (for example, right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while the output time (duration of sound) of the sound effect for the button image emphasis effect can be different between the first mode and the second mode, the output time (duration of sound) of the notification sound output for specific notifications (for example, right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) can be the same.

In addition, while it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of the sound effect for the movable device emphasis effect (or the jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow color emphasis) effect that is executed behind the movable device 73 that has descended to the center of the screen 70, etc., and can emphasize the movable device 73) different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of the notification sound that is output in response to a specific notification (for example, a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification that displays a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, the predetermined emphasis effects (e.g., reach completion emphasis effects, chance eye emphasis effects, etc.) that emphasize the expected effects (e.g., reach completion effects, chance eye effects, etc.) that raise the expectation of a jackpot have a first mode (e.g., a mode with a red light-emitting effect) and a second mode (e.g., a mode with a gold light-emitting effect). While it is possible to vary the output time (the period during which the sound is played) of the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis effect between the first mode and the second mode, it is also possible to use the same notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the first mode and when the predetermined emphasis effect is performed in the second mode.

In addition, in the hold change effect, it is possible to make the output time (duration of sound) of the sound effect of a specified emphasis effect different when the hold icon (including the hold icon on stage ST0; Figures 24, 25, etc.) is displayed in a first mode (e.g., blue) and when it is displayed in a second mode (e.g., red), while it is possible to make the notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) the same.

In addition, while it is possible to have different predetermined sounds (e.g., background music, etc.) that can be continuously output during the notification effect (variable effect) before and after the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect (Figures 58 to 66), it is also possible to have the same notification sound output for specific notifications (e.g., right-hit notification, left-hit notification, notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.). Note that the predetermined sound may be switched before, during, or after the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect, and there may also be a predetermined sound dedicated to the predetermined emphasis effect.

In addition, it is possible to use the same predetermined sound (e.g., background music, etc.) that can be continuously output during the notification effect (variable effect) before and after the execution of a first emphasis effect (e.g., a reach-establishment emphasis effect, etc.), and to use a different predetermined sound before and after the execution of a second emphasis effect (e.g., an SP development emphasis effect, etc.), which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first emphasis effect. In addition, it is possible to use the same notification sound that is output during specific notifications (e.g., a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a notification displaying a volume gauge, etc.) before and after the execution of a first emphasis effect, and to use the same notification sound before and after the execution of a second emphasis effect.

In addition, it is possible to prioritize specific notifications (for example, notifications displaying a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) over predetermined emphasis effects that emphasize decorative patterns (double numbers) that suggest or indicate a jackpot (for example, a double-number emphasis effect, a pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow color emphasis) effect, etc.).

In addition, it is possible to lengthen the execution time of specific notifications (for example, notifications displaying a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) compared to predetermined emphasis effects that emphasize decorative patterns (double numbers) that suggest or indicate a jackpot (for example, double-number emphasis effects, pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effects, jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow color emphasis) effects, etc.).

In addition, if a specific notification (e.g., a notification displaying a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) is executed during the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a double-digit confirmation emphasis effect, a pattern confirmation suggestion emphasis effect, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow color emphasis) effect, etc.) that emphasizes a decorative pattern (double numbers) that suggests or indicates a jackpot, at least part of the decorative pattern and the predetermined emphasis effect may become difficult or impossible to see due to the image of the specific notification.

In addition, while the display of a specific notification (for example, a left-hit notification) continues for a predetermined time, it can be terminated if a special symbol is displayed stationary even before the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, if a jackpot is hit and jackpot play begins). Similarly, the notification sound for the specific notification can also be terminated (although it may also continue without being terminated).

In addition, when a specific notification (for example, a notification displaying a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) and an effect using the movable device 73 are executed simultaneously, it is possible to display the specific notification with priority over an emphasis effect associated with the effect using the movable device 73 (for example, an emphasis effect (rainbow-colored emphasis) on the jackpot notification displayed behind the movable device 73 as it descends to the center of the screen 70), while causing the movable device 73 to descend to the center of the screen 70.

In addition, after a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a double-digit emphasis effect, a confirmed symbol emphasis effect, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect, etc.) that highlights a decorative pattern (double numbers) that suggests or indicates a jackpot is executed, a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification) can be executed, and the predetermined notification (e.g., a left-hit notification) can continue for a first time, and the specific notification can continue for a second time that is longer than the first time.

In addition, while a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a double-digit emphasis effect, a confirmed symbol emphasis effect, a jackpot notification color emphasis (rainbow emphasis) effect, etc.) is being executed to highlight decorative symbols (double numbers) that suggest or notify a jackpot, a specific notification (e.g., a left-hit notification) can be executed when a right-hit operation is performed to shoot the game ball into the right-side game area, and after the predetermined emphasis effect is executed, it is possible not to execute a specific notification when a right-hit operation is performed.

Furthermore, after a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., emphasis effect when a double number is formed, emphasis effect when a pattern is confirmed, emphasis effect when a jackpot is announced color (rainbow emphasis effect), etc.) that emphasizes a decorative pattern (double numbers) that suggests or indicates a jackpot is executed, a first specific notification (e.g., right-hit notification) can be executed in conjunction with the start of jackpot play. Furthermore, a second specific notification (e.g., left-hit notification) can be executed at a fixed first position on the screen 70 (e.g., the center of the screen 70), and the first specific notification can be executed at a second position on the screen 70 (e.g., the upper left of the screen 70) and then at a third position (e.g., the upper right of the screen 70). Furthermore, the first specific notification can be displayed at a position that corresponds to the game scene (presentation scene).

Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode, if a specified emphasis effect (for example, a double-digit emphasis effect, a temporary stop emphasis effect, etc.) is executed during a specific notification (for example, a right-hit notification), the specific notification (right-hit notification) will overlap with part of the specified emphasis effect and can be displayed with priority over part of the specified emphasis effect.

In addition, a first specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification) can be executed in the time-saving game mode, and a second specific notification (e.g., a left-hit notification) can be executed when the game mode transitions from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode. In addition, in the normal game mode, the second specific notification can be displayed in priority over decorative symbols and temporary stop highlighting effects.

In addition, if a specific notification (e.g., a left-hit notification) is made when transitioning from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, the specific notification can be made in the first mode (e.g., a medium-sized notification mode), and if a right-hit is detected in the normal game mode, the specific notification can be made in the first mode and then in the second mode (e.g., a large-sized notification mode).

In addition, specific notifications (for example, notifications displaying right-hit notifications, left-hit notifications, volume gauges, etc.) can be displayed with priority over re-draw emphasis effects.

In addition, it is possible to prioritize specific notifications (for example, notifications displaying a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) over highlighting effects (for example, special lighting effects) that emphasize the full-spin reach effect, which changes the display of decorative symbols based on a combination of symbols (double numbers) that indicate a jackpot.

In addition, during special effects (for example, reach completion effects, SP reach effects, etc.), while a specific image (for example, an eye-catching image that is displayed across the entire screen (or part of the screen) to draw the eye and change the mood) that can be displayed after a decorative pattern (losing symbol) indicating a loss is displayed, the output of sound effects for a specified emphasis effect (for example, temporary stop emphasis effects, etc.) can be restricted, while notification sounds for specific notifications (for example, notifications displaying a right-hit notification, a left-hit notification, a volume gauge, etc.) can be output.

In addition, when a specific notification (e.g., a right-hit notification) is made during the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a cut-in preview effect, a reach-achievement effect, etc.) that emphasizes an effect that anticipates a jackpot (e.g., a cut-in emphasis effect, a reach-achievement effect, etc.), operating the cross key 18 makes it possible to adjust the sound effect (performance effect) of the predetermined emphasis effect and also to adjust the notification sound of the specific notification (or not adjust the notification sound of the specific notification).

Furthermore, when the cross key 18 is operated during the execution of an effect that anticipates a jackpot (for example, a cut-in preview effect, a reach completion effect, etc.) or a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a decorative pattern (for example, a cut-in emphasis effect, a reach completion emphasis effect, a reach completion emphasis effect, a temporary stop emphasis effect, etc.), the sound effect (effect) of the predetermined emphasis effect can be adjusted and a specific notification (output of an operation sound for changing the volume) can be made. When the back key 170 is operated, the sound effect (effect) of the predetermined emphasis effect can be adjusted without making a specific notification (output of an operation sound for changing the volume). Note that, in response to the operation of the back key 170, the display of the volume gauge 360 or light intensity gauge 361 is not started, but the scales of the volume gauge 360 or light intensity gauge 361 that are already displayed may increase or decrease.

In addition, depending on the operation of the rear key 170 or rear key 170, the sound effect (effect) of a predetermined emphasis effect (Figures 57 to 66) can be changed from a first state (for example, volume 1 state) to a second state (for example, volume 2 state). If the power is turned off and then on again while the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis effect is set to the second state in the time-saving game mode, the time-saving game mode will be maintained, but the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis effect can be returned to the first state. In this case, the sound effect of the predetermined emphasis effect may be maintained in the second state.

[Modifications, etc.]
In addition, in the swinging emphasis effect (FIG. 30), the decorative pattern may not swing. In this case, the movement (transfer) of the light-emitting effect 304 can make the decorative pattern appear to swing. Furthermore, the swinging motion of the decorative pattern (FIG. 30) is not limited to the rotation of the number 701 of the decorative pattern. For example, it may include a swinging motion in which the entire decorative pattern changes position without changing its shape, or a motion in which at least one of the character 702, the frame 700, and the number 701 moves. Furthermore, while the swinging emphasis effect is not affected by the character movements in the temporary stop emphasis effect and the fluctuation start emphasis effect, it may be affected by the light-emitting effect. Furthermore, the swinging emphasis effect may be performed on at least one of the left, right, and center decorative patterns. Furthermore, the swinging emphasis effect may include a unique sound effect.

In addition, a change start notice emphasis (see Figure 59) may be executed. The change start notice emphasis is an effect that emphasizes decorative patterns at the start of the notification effect, similar to the chance eye emphasis effect (Figure 36), and is an emphasis effect that raises expectations of a jackpot in the notification effect currently being executed. Because the change start notice emphasis is executed at the start of the change, it can also be considered a type of change start emphasis effect.

In addition, emphasis effects that emphasize decorative patterns (for example, change start emphasis effects, temporary stop emphasis effects, swing emphasis effects, etc.) can change the size of the emphasis area (such as the proportion of the decorative pattern) by enlarging/reducing or rotating (rotating) the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, if the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center temporarily stop at the same time, the temporary stop highlighting effect and the change start highlighting effect may not be performed or may be performed in a smaller highlighted area.

Furthermore, like the temporary stop emphasis effect, the change start emphasis effect may include emphasis through enlargement/reduction or rotation (rotation) of the decorative pattern.

In addition, there are variation modes in which the central decorative pattern that last starts to change (or temporarily stops) is smaller (or larger) than the decorative patterns on the left and right, and in such cases, the variation start emphasis effect (or temporary stop emphasis effect) may be such that the proportion of the emphasis area of the central decorative pattern that last starts to change (or temporarily stops) to the decorative pattern is smaller (or larger) than the proportion of the emphasis area of the decorative patterns on the left and right.

In addition, the proportion of the decorative pattern that is taken up by the emphasis area of the decorative pattern emphasis effects (for example, temporary stop emphasis effects, fluctuation start emphasis effects) may be varied depending on the game state and presentation mode (presentation stage). Furthermore, simultaneously with the display of light-emitting effects such as fluctuation start emphasis effects, temporary stop emphasis effects, reach completion emphasis effects, and doublet completion emphasis effects, a swing emphasis effect can be executed below this light-emitting effect.

In addition, the mode of the button image emphasis effect (for example, the frequency or speed of the rapid-fire action display) may be different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (for example, a reach achievement effect, an SP development effect, etc.).

In addition, the presentation style of each highlight effect (Figures 57 to 66) may be different before and after the start of a special effect in the notification effect (for example, a reach completion effect, an SP development effect, etc.). In addition, the presentation style of each highlight effect (Figures 57 to 66) may be different depending on the presentation mode.

A predetermined emphasis effect may also be executed when at least a portion (e.g., the emphasis portion 383) of the identification image 380 (Figure 89) that identifies the presentation mode in conjunction with a change in presentation mode (presentation stage) is changed. The predetermined emphasis effect may include a first predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect associated with a change in presentation mode) and a second predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect associated with the execution of a zone effect). In this case, the notification effect in which the second predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect displaying a red light-emitting effect) is executed may be expected to result in a higher jackpot than the notification effect in which the first predetermined emphasis effect (e.g., a predetermined emphasis effect displaying a blue light-emitting effect) is executed.

Furthermore, the display mode of the highlighting effect (for example, temporary stop highlighting effect) for the decorative pattern of the number character mode (Figure 23) may differ between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game mode (or time-saving game mode), but the display mode of the highlighting effect for the decorative pattern of the number mode may not differ.

In addition, the display mode of the highlighting effects (for example, temporary stop highlighting effects) for the decorative symbols on the left and right after a reach is achieved may differ between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game mode (or the time-saving game mode), but the display of the reach-achievement highlighting effects may remain the same.

In addition, the manner in which the middle decorative symbol highlighting effect (for example, temporary stop highlighting effect) after a reach is achieved differs between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game mode (or time-saving game mode), but the manner in which the pseudo-consecutive highlighting symbol is displayed may be the same.

In addition, at least a portion of the temporary stop highlighting effects for the left and right decorative symbols may be different between the first and second effect stages in normal game mode (or time-saving game mode).

Furthermore, in certain performance stages, at least some of the temporary stop emphasis performance may be different for decorative symbols with different numbers.

Furthermore, the execution rate of reach prompting effects (and reach prompting emphasis effects) may be varied depending on the reach number (for example, a reach number of a "2" symbol or a reach number of a "7" symbol).

In addition, the number of types of specified emphasis effects (for example, temporary stop emphasis effects, change start emphasis effects, etc.) may be different between the left and right decorative patterns and the center decorative pattern.

Furthermore, in a particular performance stage, at least some of the specified emphasis effects (for example, temporary stop emphasis effects, doublet formation emphasis effects, etc.) may differ depending on whether the odd number symbols appear in a repeat or even number symbols appear in a repeat.

In addition, the button highlighting effect before (or after) the button image is displayed can be the same or different between the first half of the notification effect (for example, before a reach is achieved, before the SP reach effect begins, etc.) and the second half.

In addition, the button highlighting effects before (or after) the button images are displayed can be the same for the first and second presentation stages in normal game mode (or time-saving game mode), or they can be different.

Also, the character image (e.g., "Press!") of the button image 351 (FIG. 67(2)) and the gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period may be considered as a type of button image emphasis effect. In this case, at least one of the first part (e.g., the character image "Press!") and the second part (e.g., the button image pressing action display) of the button image emphasis effect may be common between the first half of the notification effect (e.g., before a reach is achieved, before the SP reach effect starts, etc.) and the second half.
In addition, at least one of the first part (e.g., the text image "Press!") and the second part (e.g., the button image pressing action display) of the button image highlighting effect may be common between the first and second presentation stages in the normal game state (or the time-saving game state).
Furthermore, the button image motion display (for example, a rapid-fire motion display) of the button image highlighting effect may have a plurality of motion cycles.
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image "Press!") and the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action) may be different before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.).
In addition, before the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.), the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image "Press!") may be made different from the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action).
Furthermore, after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.), the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image "Press!") may be different from the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action).
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the text image "Press!") and the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (e.g., the display of the button image pressing action) may be different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state.
In addition, in the normal game mode (or the time-saving game mode), at least one of the execution time of the first part of the button image emphasis effect (for example, the text image "Press!") and the execution time of the second part of the button image emphasis effect (for example, the display of the button image pressing action) may be made different.

Furthermore, the button image emphasis effect for the first operation response effect (e.g., a single press) may have a first part (e.g., a text image "Press!") and a second part (e.g., a button image pressing motion display), and the button image emphasis effect for the second operation response effect (e.g., a rapid press/long press) may have a third part (e.g., a text image "Press!") and a fourth part (e.g., a button image pressing motion display). At least two of the aspects of the first to fourth parts may be different. At least two of the execution times of the effects for the first to fourth parts may be different.

In addition, the highlighting effect (for example, the type of button image highlighting effect) executed when the effect button 16 is operated may differ depending on whether or not a jackpot has been reached.
Furthermore, the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of effect button 16) when the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of effect button 16) is being executed may be the same or different between the first effect stage and the second effect stage in the same game state (or different game states).
In addition, depending on the game status, the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of effect button 16) when the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of effect button 16) is being executed may be the same or different.
Furthermore, when the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of effect button 16) and the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of effect button 16) are executed, the execution time of the first effect button emphasis effect and the execution time of the second effect button emphasis effect may be the same or different.
In addition, the ratio of the execution time of the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., the illumination of effect button 16) to the execution time of the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., the vibration of effect button 16) may be different before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., a reach effect, an SP development effect, etc.).
In addition, the ratio of the execution time of the second effect button emphasis effect (e.g., illumination of effect button 16) to the execution time of the first effect button emphasis effect (e.g., vibration of effect button 16) may be varied depending on the game status.

In addition, the first presentation stage and the second presentation stage in the same game state may use the same or different highlighting effects (e.g., highlighting a double number, highlighting a color (rainbow color) for highlighting a jackpot, etc.) that notify a jackpot (e.g., highlighting a double number), etc.
In addition, the first part of the movable role highlighting effect (for example, the operation of the movable role 73, the light emission of the movable role 73 while it is not moving) may be the same or different before and after the start of a special effect (for example, a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.), and the second part of the movable role highlighting effect (for example, the light emission of the movable role 73, the light emission of the movable role 73 while it is moving) may be the same or different.
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first part and the execution time of the second part may be different before and after the start of a special effect (for example, a reach-establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.).
Furthermore, before (or after) the start of a special effect (for example, a reach establishment effect, an SP development effect, etc.), the execution time of the first part and the execution time of the second part may be different or may be the same.
In addition, at least one of the execution time of the first part and the execution time of the second part may be varied depending on the game state or the presentation stage.
Furthermore, in the same game state or presentation stage, the execution time of the first portion and the execution time of the second portion may be different or may be the same.

In addition, depending on the execution of each highlighting effect (Figures 57 to 66), a lamp (such as the board lamp 10a or the frame lamp 10) may be illuminated (a specific illumination depending on the highlighting effect being executed), which can be considered a type of highlighting effect. In this case, a specific lamp illumination may be emitted corresponding to the highlighting effect being executed.

Furthermore, even if the button highlighting image presentation is the same color (white button image, red button image, etc.) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the manner of the button image highlighting presentation before the button image is displayed may be different.
Furthermore, in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the appearance of the first part of the button image emphasis presentation during the effective operation period (for example, the color of the button image) is the same, but the appearance of the first part of the button image emphasis presentation (for example, the operation appearance of the text or button image) may be different.

In addition, the eye-catching image that is displayed after the SP reach performance is executed and the losing numbers are stopped, or when the performance stage is changed, may be displayed in front of the hold icon, but it may not be displayed in front of the volume gauge 360 or the light intensity gauge 361.
Furthermore, the volume gauge 360 and the light intensity gauge 361 may be displayed in front of the decorative pattern, but may not be displayed in front of the special pattern 400 (Figure 56).
Furthermore, it is preferable that the left-hit notification image 371 be displayed in front of the volume gauge 360 and the light quantity gauge 361.
Furthermore, even if the volume is adjusted using the cross key 18, it is preferable that the warning sound for the left-handed hit notification is not adjusted.
In addition, it is preferable that the left-hit notification image 371 be displayed in front of each highlight effect (Figures 57 to 66).
The execution time of the left hit notification may be longer than the predetermined emphasis effect (FIGS. 57 to 66). The left hit notification may also be temporarily terminated at the end of the notification effect (when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped).

Furthermore, after the SP reach effect (or SPSP reach effect) is executed, a losing combination is displayed, and an eye-catching image is displayed, temporary stop emphasis may be executed. On the other hand, when a revival winning effect is executed, the SP reach effect (or SPSP reach effect) is executed, a losing combination is displayed, and an eye-catching image is displayed, temporary stop emphasis may be executed.
In addition, in the time-saving game mode, the execution time (variation time) of an announcement effect in which a predetermined emphasis effect on a decorative pattern (for example, an announcement effect to consume remaining reserves) is limited may be made shorter than that of an announcement effect in which a predetermined emphasis effect on a decorative pattern (for example, an emphasis effect to start a change, an emphasis effect to temporarily stop, etc.) is executed.
Furthermore, when the effect of the movable device 73 that suggests or notifies of a jackpot is being executed, the decorative pattern may be hidden by the movable device 73, limiting visibility of the decorative pattern, but it is preferable that at least a portion of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 be displayed so that it is visible to the player.
Furthermore, when the notification effect ends (when the decorative pattern is not confirmed), one of the display of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 and the notification sound (adjustment sound) may be restricted, but the other may not be restricted.
In addition, the volume gauge 360/light gauge 361 may be displayed in front of each of the highlighting effects (FIGS. 57 to 66).

It is also preferable that the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 be displayed in the same display mode regardless of the performance stage or game state.
Furthermore, it is preferable that the display time of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is constant at any timing during the execution of the notification effect when the cross key 18 is operated once.
In addition, while waiting for customers, the display time of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 may be longer than when the notification performance is being performed.
Furthermore, the display mode of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 may be different when waiting for customers and when the notification effect is being executed, or may be the same.
Furthermore, when the light intensity is controlled by operating the cross key 18 (displaying the light intensity gauge 361), the light intensity of the lamps (the lamps of the effect buttons 16, the lamps of the movable parts 73, the frame lamp 10, etc.) changes, but it is preferable that the light intensity of the main/sub image display sections 70, 71 does not change.
Furthermore, the operation sound for adjusting the volume and the operation sound for adjusting the light intensity by operating the cross key 18 may be different or may be the same.
Also, the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 may overlap with a changing effect symbol, but may be controlled so as not to overlap with an effect symbol that has stopped being fixed.
In addition, when the notification effect is not being executed, it may be possible to execute an effect button highlighting effect or a movable role highlighting effect.
In addition, when the notification effect ends, one of the volume gauge 360/light gauge 361 and the adjustment sound may be limited.
Furthermore, the display time of the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is a specific time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of display in response to operation of the cross key 18, but if the cross key 18 is operated while the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 is being displayed, the volume gauge 360/light intensity gauge 361 may be controlled so that it is displayed for a specific time from the time of this operation (for example, 5 seconds from the last operation).

Furthermore, the number of display levels (total number of scales) of the volume gauge 360 and the number of volume levels when operating the volume with the rear keys 170 may be different or the same.
Furthermore, one level (scale) of the volume gauge 360 may be associated with multiple levels of volume operation of the rear key 170 .
It is also preferable that an operation sound is output when the cross key 18 is operated to change the volume, and that no operation sound is output when the rear key 170 is operated.
Furthermore, if the volume is adjusted by operating the rear key 170 while the notification effect is being performed, the volume changes, and at that time the volume gauge 360 may or may not be displayed.

In addition, the volume of the notification sound for left-handed hit notification may be changeable by volume operation, or may be fixed and unchangeable.
In addition, the left-handed hit notification may include a first left-handed hit notification and a second left-handed hit notification, and the notification time of the first left-handed hit notification may be longer than that of the first left-handed hit notification.
In addition, the first left-handed hit notification may be made by displaying the left-handed hit notification image 371 and outputting a notification sound, and the second left-handed hit notification may be made by adding a notification using lamps or the like.
Furthermore, the left-hit notification image 371 may be displayed in front of the volume gauge 360/light quantity gauge 361 or behind it.
Furthermore, the left hit notification image 371 may be displayed in the same manner or in different manners in the first and second performance stages.
In addition, emphasis effects (e.g., emphasis movements, light-emitting effects, emphasis sounds, etc.) are executed to emphasize the left-hit notification image 371 and the left-hit notification image 370, and both emphasis effects may be common to each other, or at least some of them may be different.
Furthermore, when a right-hit notification is made, it may or may not be accompanied by an alarm sound, and when a left-hit notification is made, it may or may not be accompanied by an alarm sound.
In addition, the right-hit notification image 370 may be displayed on the right side (top right, etc.) of the screen 70, and the left-hit notification image 371 may be displayed on the left side (top left, etc.) of the screen 70.
Furthermore, the right-hit notification image 370 and the left-hit notification image 371 may differ in at least one of their display positions and sizes.

In addition, lamps corresponding to left-hit notifications (or right-hit notifications) (for example, frame lamps, movable part lamps, effect button lamps, etc.) may or may not be illuminated.

In addition, the right-hit notification image 370 may or may not be displayed while the results are displayed. Also, if a jackpot occurs with remaining reserves, a left-hit notification may or may not be executed before the jackpot occurs.

Also, in the jackpot notification display, if the display control unit 400 is no longer able to receive commands from the main control unit 100, a predetermined emphasis display (for example, an emphasis display when a double number is formed) may be executed, but the left-hit notification may not be executed.
Furthermore, in a notification effect in which a specific effect (for example, a pre-reading preview effect, a reach effect, etc.) is performed, if the effect control unit 400 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, the emphasis effect associated with the specific effect (for example, a chance eye emphasis effect, a reach establishment emphasis effect, etc.) may be executed, but the left-hit notification may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the effect control unit 400 fails to receive the notification effect start command from the main control unit 100, the change start emphasis effect and the first pre-determination effect (e.g., chance eye notification effect, etc.) cannot be executed, but the second pre-determination effect (e.g., hold change notification effect, etc.) may be controlled to be executable.

Furthermore, if the performance control unit 400 misses a notification performance stop command from the main control unit 100, it may continue the notification performance without terminating it (i.e., temporarily stopping the decorative pattern without displaying a definitive stop), and if it receives the next notification performance start command in that state, it may execute the notification performance according to the received notification performance start command.
In addition, if the performance control unit 400 misses the notification performance start command from the main control unit 100 and also misses the next notification performance start command, the performance emphasizing the start of change will be executed as usual, but the performance of shifting (moving) the pending icon may be controlled to be in a different form from usual (for example, in a form in which the pending icon warps discontinuously).
Furthermore, if the effect control unit 400 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 during the execution of a notification effect in which a specific emphasis effect (for example, a double-digit emphasis effect, a reach emphasis effect, a chance effect emphasis effect, etc.) is executed, the specific emphasis effect will be executed, but the oscillation period after the decorative pattern has temporarily stopped (and the execution period of the oscillation emphasis effect) may be controlled to be longer than when commands can be received normally.

In addition, lamps corresponding to each highlight effect (Figures 57 to 66) may be illuminated (for example, lamps for effect buttons, movable parts, frame lamps, etc.).

Furthermore, each feature of the emphasis effects described above may be replaced with a feature of another emphasis effect, or other features of the emphasis effect may be added, to increase interest, etc.

Furthermore, while the features (configurations) of each embodiment and variant have been described above, it goes without saying that these features may be combined to enhance interest, etc. Furthermore, the features of each embodiment and variant described above may also be reversed to create features. For example, a configuration that performs a certain operation, etc. may be changed to a configuration that does not perform this certain operation, etc. Furthermore, a configuration that does not perform a certain operation, etc. may be changed to a configuration that performs this certain operation, etc.

Furthermore, the shape, number, and installation location of each component provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other shapes, numbers, and installation locations as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention.Furthermore, it goes without saying that the numerical values used in the above-described processing are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other numerical values.

The present invention has been described in detail above using embodiments, but the foregoing description is in all respects merely illustrative of the present invention and is not intended to limit its scope. It goes without saying that various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, it should be understood that the terms used in this specification have the meanings commonly used in the relevant field. Therefore, unless otherwise defined, all technical terms and terminology used in this specification have the same meanings as commonly understood by those skilled in the art to which this invention belongs. In the event of any conflict, the present specification (including definitions) will take precedence.

1... gaming machine 9... speaker 16... effect button 18... cross key 43... normal winning opening 45, 47... start opening 44... gates 50, 56... big winning opening 70, 71... image display unit (screen)
73... Movable parts

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
A determination means for making a determination;
game control means for controlling the progress of a game and transmitting predetermined commands based on the determination result of the determination means;
a presentation control means for controlling a predetermined game presentation based on the predetermined command transmitted by the game control means;
A display means for displaying the game performance;
and an operating means,
The performance control means
The display means can display a display effect in which a specific image is displayed in a varying manner, then temporarily stopped, and then stopped;
When the specific image in the first column is temporarily stopped and displayed, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the specific image,
When the specific image in the third column is temporarily stopped after the specific images in the first column and the second column are temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the specific image;
A third emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the specific image during the temporary stop display.
The third emphasis effect may include a change effect that changes the specific image,
It is possible to execute specific notifications regarding performance effects,
The first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect can be performed by displaying an image and outputting an audible signal;
The third emphasis effect may be an image display effect without an audible output effect,
When the first emphasis effect is executed on the specific image in the first column and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect is executed on the specific image in the third column, and then the third emphasis effect on the specific image in the first column and the third emphasis effect on the specific image in the third column can be executed in synchronization with each other,
The specific notification can be performed by displaying an image and outputting an audible signal,
The image display of at least one of the first emphasis effect, the second emphasis effect, and the third emphasis effect can be restricted from affecting the image display of the specific notification,
The display performance can be set in any one of a plurality of performance modes including a first performance mode and a second performance mode ,
In the display effect, a suggestion effect can be executed that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed,
A fourth emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the suggestion effect image in the suggestion effect,
The fourth emphasis effect may include a first emphasis effect that changes the suggestive effect image in a first cycle, and a second emphasis effect that changes the suggestive effect image in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle,
When the first effect mode is set, a first sound effect related to the fourth emphasis effect can be output;
When the second performance mode is set, a second sound effect different from the first sound effect related to the fourth emphasis performance can be output;
The first sound effect and the second sound effect are not sound effects that are output in response to a preset setting by a player,
The fourth emphasis effect can be made different before and after the start of a predetermined special effect in the display effect,
A fifth emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation means can be executed,
The fifth emphasis effect may include an effect using a vibration sound of the operating means .